Modems Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 271

SELL FASTER,

Type your search here Modems SELL


BUY SMARTER

Router Modem Switch

All filters Region

Sort by: Recommended

VIP TOP+

4G Modem With Wifi Hotspot


USh 85,000
4g wifi modem with hotspot for sharing to multiple devicesBvot
Brand New
Kampala, Central Division Promoted

VIP TOP+

4G Universal Modem
USh 80,000
Universal
4g wifi
sd slotOther
Brand New
Kampala, Central Division Promoted

VIP TOP+

Huawei E3372 4G LTE Modem Unlocked to All Networks


USh 85,000
(1) The Huawei E3372h-320 4G Dongle is UNLOCKED to all networks so use a sim card of your choice (2)...Huawei
Brand New
Kampala, Central Division Promoted

VIP TOP+

4GLITE USB MODEM Unlocked With Wi-Fi Hotspot


USh 65,000
High speed wireless connection up to 150Mbps Plug & play. Only power source required Internet...Bvot
Brand New
Kampala, Kawempe Promoted

TOP+

Wireless Modem
USh 55,000
It runs at working speed of 3g/4g networkZTE
Brand New
Kampala Promoted

VIP TOP+

Modem 3/4g
USh 35,000
4g huawei wireless usb unlocked modem . get one and make your network faster.
location: kisakyamaria...Other
Brand New
Kampala Promoted

Huawei Modem E220


USh 50,000
Huawei E220 HSDPA USB Modem in perfect condition for computer internet
with sim card. call or... Huawei Used

4 Kampala, Nakawa

Original Africell Modem Unlocked


USh 65,000
It's really the best, unlocked and its fast Used Huawei

2 Wakiso Promoted

New Unlocked Modems(Dongles)


USh 100,000
Dear clients,we have 3g and 4g(lte) unlocked modems at a negotiable price.Inbox,call or
what’s app... New

1 Kampala Promoted

Siera Wireless Aircard S775 PCMCIA Card Modem


USh 35,000
This is a sierra wireless aircard 775 :: gprs / edge modem aircard 775
it uses big
simcars and... Other Used

9 Kampala, Central Division Promoted

Unlocked 4G /5g Modems


USh 120,000
4g / 5g modems for sale , the have a hot spot wifi option as well. Bvot Brand New

1 Kampala, Central Division Promoted

Unlocked 4g Modem
USh 60,000
Brand new unlocked 4g modems ZTE Brand New

4 Kampala

VIP TOP+

4G LTE USB Dongle Wifi Modem All Network Unlocked


USh 60,000
4g lte usb dongle wireless all network unlocked wi-fi modem - white
high speed data rate: down-link...Bvot
Brand New
Kampala, Central Division Promoted

TOP+

Open Network Modems at Whosale Price


USh 60,000
Brand new open network modems at wholesale price in ugandaOther
Brand New
Kampala Promoted

4G Modem 3N1
USh 80,000
4g lte modem strictly works with 4g lines for example lyca mobile Other Brand New

4 Kampala Promoted

Hsdpa Universal Modems


USh 45,000
Hsdpa universal modem works with any data enabled simcard 3g/4g Brand New

4 Kampala Promoted

Huawei E3372 4G Modem


USh 110,000
With the Huawei E3372 4G Dongle, you can connect your laptop to the
internet, regardless of your... Huawei Brand New

4 Kampala, Central Division Promoted

USB Modems 3G And 4G


USh 60,000
Usb modems for your laptop, desktop and car Huawei Brand New

1 Kampala Promoted

Wireless Modem Wifi Pro


USh 130,000
Mifi wireless modem 5G LTE network
support many servers Smile Brand New

3 Kampala, Central Division Promoted

Hsdpa Universal Modem


USh 45,000
For any gsm carrier
works with any data enabled sim card
hsdpa usb
modem
7.2mbps maximum... Other Brand New

6 Kampala Promoted
3600
Modem User’s Guide
Trademarks
Any trademarks mentioned in this manual are acknowledged to be the
property of the trademark owners.

ii Modem 3600
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

)&&5HTXLUHPHQWV
7KLVHTXLSPHQWFRPSOLHVZLWK)&&UXOHV3DUW/RFDWHGRQWKH
HTXLSPHQWLVWKH)&&5HJLVWUDWLRQ1XPEHUDQG5LQJHU(TXLYDOHQFH
1XPEHU 5(1 <RXPXVWSURYLGHWKLVLQIRUPDWLRQWRWKHWHOHSKRQH
FRPSDQ\LIUHTXHVWHG
7KH5HJLVWUDWLRQ1XPEHUDQG5(1LVLQVFULEHGRQWKHSULQWHGFLUFXLW
ERDUGRQLQVHUWFDUGVRURQDODEHODWWDFKHGWRHLWKHUWKHFKDVVLVERWWRP
RUPHWDOHQGSODWHRQVWDQGDORQHRUUDFNPRGHOV7KH)&&UHTXLUHVWKDW
WKHVHQXPEHUVEHSURPLQHQWO\GLVSOD\HGRQDQRXWVLGHVXUIDFHRIWKH
HTXLSPHQW
7KH5(1LVXVHGWRGHWHUPLQHWKHQXPEHURIGHYLFHV\RXPD\OHJDOO\
FRQQHFWWR\RXUWHOHSKRQHOLQH,QPRVWDUHDVWKHVXPRIWKH5(1RIDOO
GHYLFHVFRQQHFWHGWRRQHOLQHPXVWQRWH[FHHGILYH  &RQWDFW\RXU
WHOHSKRQHFRPSDQ\WRGHWHUPLQHWKHPD[LPXP5(1IRU\RXUFDOOLQJ
DUHD
$YDULHW\RI8QLYHUVDO6HUYLFH2UGHULQJ&RGH 862& WHOHSKRQHZDOO
MDFNVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUGLIIHUHQWW\SHVRIGHYLFHVRUVHUYLFHV7KH862&
MDFNUHTXLUHGIRUWKLVXQLWLV5-5-6-0
7KHWHOHSKRQHFRPSDQ\PD\FKDQJHWHFKQLFDORSHUDWLRQVRUSURFHGXUHV
DIIHFWLQJ\RXUHTXLSPHQW<RXZLOOEHQRWLILHGRIFKDQJHVLQDGYDQFHWR
JLYH\RXDPSOHWLPHWRPDLQWDLQXQLQWHUUXSWHGWHOHSKRQHVHUYLFH
,I\RXH[SHULHQFHWURXEOHZLWKWKLVWHOHSKRQHHTXLSPHQWSOHDVHFRQWDFW
Black Box
at 724-746-5500

IRULQIRUPDWLRQRQREWDLQLQJVHUYLFHRUUHSDLUV7KHWHOHSKRQHFRPSDQ\
PD\DVNWKDW\RXGLVFRQQHFWWKLVHTXLSPHQWIURPWKHQHWZRUNXQWLOWKH
SUREOHPKDVEHHQUHVROYHG,I\RXUHTXLSPHQWFRQWLQXHVWRGLVUXSWWKH
QHWZRUNWKHWHOHSKRQHFRPSDQ\PD\WHPSRUDULO\GLVFRQQHFWVHUYLFH,I
WKLVRFFXUV\RXZLOOEHLQIRUPHGRI\RXUULJKWWRILOHDFRPSODLQWZLWK
WKH)&&

0RGHP LLL
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

7KLVHTXLSPHQWPD\QRWEHXVHGRQFRLQVHUYLFHSURYLGHGE\WKH
WHOHSKRQHFRPSDQ\&RQQHFWLRQWRSDUW\OLQHVLVVXEMHFWWRVWDWHWDULIIV
$Q)&&FRPSOLDQWWHOHSKRQHFRUGDQGPRGXODUSOXJDUHSURYLGHGZLWK
WKLVHTXLSPHQWZKLFKLVGHVLJQHGWRFRQQHFWWRWKHWHOHSKRQHQHWZRUN
RUSUHPLVHVZLULQJXVLQJDFRPSDWLEOHPRGXODUMDFNWKDWLV3DUW
FRPSOLDQW6HHLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQVLQ&KDSWHU,QVWDOODWLRQIRU
GHWDLOV
)&&)D[%UDQGLQJ5HTXLUHPHQWV
7KH7HOHSKRQH&RQVXPHU3URWHFWLRQ$FWRIPDNHVLWXQODZIXOIRU
DQ\SHUVRQWRXVHDFRPSXWHURURWKHUHOHFWURQLFGHYLFHWRVHQGDQ\
PHVVDJHYLDDWHOHSKRQHID[PDFKLQHRUPRGHPXQOHVVVXFKPHVVDJH
FOHDUO\FRQWDLQVLQDPDUJLQDWWKHWRSRUERWWRPRIHDFKWUDQVPLWWHG
SDJHRURQWKHILUVWSDJHRIWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQWKHGDWHDQGWLPHLWLVVHQW
DQGDQLGHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHEXVLQHVVRURWKHUHQWLW\RURWKHULQGLYLGXDO
VHQGLQJWKHPHVVDJHDQGWKHWHOHSKRQHQXPEHURIWKHVHQGLQJPDFKLQH
RUVXFKEXVLQHVVRWKHUHQWLW\RULQGLYLGXDO
3URJUDPPLQJRIWKLVLQIRUPDWLRQLVDIXQFWLRQRIWKHID[VRIWZDUHZKLFK
UXQVRQ\RXUFRPSXWHU,QRUGHUWRSURJUDPWKLVLQIRUPDWLRQSOHDVH
FRQVXOWWKHGRFXPHQWDWLRQSURYLGHGZLWK\RXUID[VRIWZDUH

)&&3DUW'HFODUDWLRQ2I&RQIRUPLW\
)25+20(252)),&(86(
0RGHO1DPH0RGHP9$&YHUVLRQRQO\

&DXWLRQ
7KLVHTXLSPHQWXVHVJHQHUDWHVDQGFDQUDGLDWHUDGLR
IUHTXHQF\HQHUJ\LQWHUIHULQJZLWKUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV
LIQRWLQVWDOOHGDQGXVHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHLQVWUXFWLRQ
PDQXDO,WKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGFRPSOLHVZLWKWKHOLPLWV
IRUD&ODVV%FRPSXWLQJGHYLFHDFFRUGLQJWR)&&5XOHV
3DUW2SHUDWLRQRIWKLVHTXLSPHQWLQDUHVLGHQWLDODUHD
PD\FDXVHLQWHUIHUHQFH,ILWGRHV\RXPXVWFRUUHFWWKH
FDXVHRIWKHLQWHUIHUHQFH
&KDQJHVRUPRGLILFDWLRQVWRWKLVXQLWQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKH
SDUW\UHVSRQVLEOHIRUFRPSOLDQFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU
VDXWKRULW\WR
RSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW

LY 0RGHP
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

6KLHOGHG&DEOHV
7KLVSURGXFWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGFRPSOLHVZLWK)&&OLPLWVIRUD&ODVV%
FRPSXWLQJGHYLFH7HVWLQJZDVGRQHZLWKVKLHOGHGFRPSXWHUFDEOHV
8VLQJXQVKLHOGHGFDEOHVFRXOGFDXVH\RXUV\VWHPWRHPLWH[FHVVUDGLR
IUHTXHQF\LQFUHDVLQJWKHFKDQFHRILQWHUIHUHQFH7RFRPSO\ZLWK)&&
UHJXODWLRQVLWLVQHFHVVDU\WRXVHVKLHOGHGFRPSXWHUFDEOHVZLWK\RXU
LQVWDOODWLRQ
)252)),&(86(21/<
0RGHO1DPH0RGHPDOORWKHUYHUVLRQV

&DXWLRQ
7KLVHTXLSPHQWXVHVJHQHUDWHVDQGFDQUDGLDWHUDGLR
IUHTXHQF\HQHUJ\LQWHUIHULQJZLWKUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV
LIQRWLQVWDOOHGDQGXVHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHLQVWUXFWLRQ
PDQXDO,WKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGFRPSOLHVZLWKWKHOLPLWV
IRUD&ODVV$FRPSXWLQJGHYLFHDFFRUGLQJWR)&&5XOHV
3DUW2SHUDWLRQRIWKLVHTXLSPHQWLQDUHVLGHQWLDODUHD
PD\FDXVHLQWHUIHUHQFH,ILWGRHV\RXPXVWFRUUHFWWKH
FDXVHRIWKHLQWHUIHUHQFH
&KDQJHVRUPRGLILFDWLRQVWRWKLVXQLWQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKH
SDUW\UHVSRQVLEOHIRUFRPSOLDQFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU
VDXWKRULW\WR
RSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW
6KLHOGHG&DEOHV
7KLVSURGXFWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGFRPSOLHVZLWK)&&OLPLWVIRUD&ODVV$
FRPSXWLQJGHYLFH7HVWLQJZDVGRQHZLWKVKLHOGHGFRPSXWHUFDEOHV
8VLQJXQVKLHOGHGFDEOHVFRXOGFDXVH\RXUV\VWHPWRHPLWH[FHVVUDGLR
IUHTXHQF\LQFUHDVLQJWKHFKDQFHRILQWHUIHUHQFH7RFRPSO\ZLWK)&&
UHJXODWLRQVLWLVQHFHVVDU\WRXVHVKLHOGHGFRPSXWHUFDEOHVZLWK\RXU
LQVWDOODWLRQ

0RGHP Y
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

6SHFLDO5HTXLUHPHQWV)RU&DQDGD
&HUWDLQUHTXLUHPHQWVH[LVWIRUGDWDFRPPXQLFDWLRQSURGXFWV
PDQXIDFWXUHGIRUXVHLQ&DQDGD3ULQFLSOHDPRQJWKHVHUHTXLUHPHQWVLV
WKHDSSOLFDWLRQRIWKH,&ODEHODVGHVFULEHGEHORZ+RZHYHUFHUWDLQGDWD
FRPPXQLFDWLRQSURGXFWVGRQRWUHTXLUHWKH,&ODEHOQRUDGKHUHQFHWR,&
UHTXLUHPHQWV,IWKLVLVWKHFDVHWKH,&ODEHOZLOOQRWEHDIIL[HGWRWKH
XQLWV
,QGXVWU\&DQDGD ,& 5HTXLUHPHQWV
,&ODEHOVDUHDIIL[HGWRHDFKXQLWVROGLQ&DQDGD7KLVODEHOKDVWKH
FHUWLILFDWLRQQXPEHUIRUWKDWSDUWLFXODUXQLW7KHQXPEHUVDUHGLIIHUHQW
IRUHDFKPRGHO
7KH,QGXVWU\&DQDGDODEHOLGHQWLILHVFHUWLILHGHTXLSPHQW7KLV
FHUWLILFDWLRQPHDQVWKDWWKHHTXLSPHQWPHHWVFHUWDLQ
WHOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVQHWZRUNSURWHFWLYHRSHUDWLRQDODQGVDIHW\
UHTXLUHPHQWV,&GRHVQRWJXDUDQWHHWKHHTXLSPHQWZLOORSHUDWHWRWKH
XVHU
VVDWLVIDFWLRQ
%HIRUHLQVWDOOLQJWKLVHTXLSPHQWXVHUVVKRXOGHQVXUHWKDWLWLV
SHUPLVVLEOHWREHFRQQHFWHGWRWKHIDFLOLWLHVRIWKHORFDO
WHOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVFRPSDQ\7KHHTXLSPHQWPXVWDOVREHLQVWDOOHG
XVLQJDQDFFHSWDEOHPHWKRGRIFRQQHFWLRQ,QVRPHFDVHVWKHFRPSDQ\
V
LQVLGHZLULQJDVVRFLDWHGZLWKDVLQJOHOLQHLQGLYLGXDOVHUYLFHPD\EH
H[WHQGHGE\PHDQVRIDFHUWLILHGFRQQHFWRUDVVHPEO\ WHOHSKRQH
H[WHQVLRQFRUG 7KHFXVWRPHUVKRXOGEHDZDUHWKDWFRPSOLDQFHZLWKWKH
DERYHFRQGLWLRQVPD\QRWSUHYHQWGHJUDGDWLRQRIVHUYLFHLQVRPH
VLWXDWLRQV
5HSDLUVWRFHUWLILHGHTXLSPHQWVKRXOGEHPDGHE\DQDXWKRUL]HG
&DQDGLDQPDLQWHQDQFHIDFLOLW\GHVLJQDWHGE\WKHVXSSOLHU$Q\UHSDLUV
RUDOWHUDWLRQVPDGHE\WKHXVHUWRWKLVHTXLSPHQWRUHTXLSPHQW
PDOIXQFWLRQVPD\JLYHWKHWHOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVFRPSDQ\FDXVHWR
UHTXHVWWKHXVHUWRGLVFRQQHFWWKHHTXLSPHQW)RUWKHLURZQSURWHFWLRQ
XVHUVVKRXOGHQVXUHWKDWWKHHOHFWULFDOJURXQGFRQQHFWLRQVRIWKHSRZHU
XWLOLW\WHOHSKRQHOLQHVDQGLQWHUQDOPHWDOOLFZDWHUSLSHV\VWHPLI
SUHVHQWDUHFRQQHFWHGWRJHWKHU7KLVSUHFDXWLRQPD\EHSDUWLFXODUO\
LPSRUWDQWLQUXUDODUHDV

YL 0RGHP
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

&DXWLRQ8VHUVVKRXOGQRWDWWHPSWWRPDNHLQVWDOODWLRQFRQQHFWLRQV
WKHPVHOYHVEXWVKRXOGFRQWDFWWKHDSSURSULDWHHOHFWULFLQVSHFWLRQ
DXWKRULW\RUHOHFWULFLDQ
5LQJHU(TXLYDOHQFH1XPEHU
7KH5LQJHU(TXLYDOHQFH1XPEHU 5(1 DVVLJQHGWRHDFKWHUPLQDO
GHYLFHSURYLGHVDQLQGLFDWLRQRIWKHPD[LPXPQXPEHURIWHUPLQDOV
DOORZHGWREHFRQQHFWHGWRDWHOHSKRQHLQWHUIDFH7KHWHUPLQDWLRQRQDQ
LQWHUIDFHPD\FRQVLVWRIDQ\FRPELQDWLRQRIGHYLFHVVXEMHFWRQO\WRWKH
UHTXLUHPHQWWKDWWKHVXPRIWKH5LQJHU(TXLYDOHQFH1XPEHUVRIDOOWKH
GHYLFHVGRHVQRWH[FHHGILYH  
&$1$',$1(0,66,215(48,5(0(176 0RGHP
9DF
7KLV&ODVV%GLJLWDODSSDUDWXVPHHWVDOOUHTXLUHPHQWVRIWKH&DQDGLDQ
,QWHUIHUHQFH&DXVLQJ(TXLSPHQW5HJXODWLRQV
&HWDSSDUHLOQXPpULTXHGHODFODVVH%UHVSHFWHWRXWHVOHVH[LJHQFHVGX
5qJOHPHQWVXUOHPDWpULHOEURXLOOHXUGX&DQDGD
&$1$',$1(0,66,215(48,5(0(176 0RGHPRWKHU
YHUVLRQV
7KLV&ODVV$GLJLWDODSSDUDWXVPHHWVDOOUHTXLUHPHQWVRIWKH&DQDGLDQ
,QWHUIHUHQFH&DXVLQJ(TXLSPHQW5HJXODWLRQV
&HWDSSDUHLOQXPpULTXHGHODFODVVH$UHVSHFWHWRXWHVOHVH[LJHQFHVGX
5qJOHPHQWVXUOHPDWpULHOEURXLOOHXUGX&DQDGD

0RGHP YLL
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

1RUPDV1RUPDV2ILFLDOHV0H[LFDQDV 120
(OHFWULFDO6DIHW\6WDWHPHQW

,16758&&,21(6'(6(*85,'$'
 7RGDVODVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHVHJXULGDG\RSHUDFLyQGHEHUiQVHU
OHtGDVDQWHVGHTXHHODSDUDWRHOpFWULFRVHDRSHUDGR
 /DVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHVHJXULGDG\RSHUDFLyQGHEHUiQVHU
JXDUGDGDVSDUDUHIHUHQFLDIXWXUD
 7RGDVODVDGYHUWHQFLDVHQHODSDUDWRHOpFWULFR\HQVXV
LQVWUXFFLRQHVGHRSHUDFLyQGHEHQVHUUHVSHWDGDV
 7RGDVODVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHRSHUDFLyQ\XVRGHEHQVHUVHJXLGDV
 (ODSDUDWRHOpFWULFRQRGHEHUiVHUXVDGRFHUFDGHODJXD±SRU
HMHPSORFHUFDGHODWLQDGHEDxRODYDERVyWDQRPRMDGRRFHUFD
GHXQDDOEHUFDHWF
 (ODSDUDWRHOpFWULFRGHEHVHUXVDGR~QLFDPHQWHFRQFDUULWRVR
SHGHVWDOHVTXHVHDQUHFRPHQGDGRVSRUHOIDEULFDQWH
 (OSDUDWRHOpFWULFRGHEHVHUPRQWDGRDODSDUHGRDOWHFKRVyOR
FRPRVHDUHFRPHQGDGRSRUHOIDEULFDQWH
 6HUYLFLR±(OXVXDULRQRGHEHLQWHQWDUGDUVHUYLFLRDOHTXLSR
HOpFWULFRPiVDOOiDORGHVFULWRHQODVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHRSHUDFLyQ
7RGRRWURVHUYLFLRGHEHUiVHUUHIHULGRDSHUVRQDOGHVHUYLFLR
FDOLILFDGR
 (ODSDUDWRHOpFWULFRGHEHVHUVLWXDGRGHWDOPDQHUDTXHVX
SRVLFLyQQRLQWHUILHUDVXXVR/DFRORFDFLyQGHODSDUDWRHOpFWULFR
VREUHXQDFDPDVRIiDOIRPEUDRVXSHUILFLHVLPLODUSXHGH
EORTXHDODYHQWLODFLyQQRVHGHEHFRORFDUHQOLEUHURVRJDELQHWHV
TXHLPSLGDQHOIOXMRGHDLUHSRUORVRULILFLRVGHYHQWLODFLyQ
 (OHTXLSRHOpFWULFRGHEHUVHUVLWXDGRIXHUDGHODOFDQFHGHIXHQWHV
GHFDORUFRPRUDGLDGRUHVUHJLVWURVGHFDORUHVWXIDVXRWURV
DSDUDWRV LQFOX\HQGRDPSOLILFDGRUHV TXHSURGXFHQFDORU
 (ODSDUDWRHOpFWULFRGHEHUiVHUFRQQHFWDGRDXQDIXHQWHGHSRGHU
VyORGHOWLSRGHVFULWRHQHOLQVWUXFWLYRGHRSHUDFLyQRFRPRVH
LQGLTXHHQHODSDUDWR
 3UHFDXFLyQGHEHVHUWRPDGDGHWDOPDQHUDTXHODWLHUUDILVLFD\OD
SRODUL]DFLyQGHOHTXLSRQRVHDHOLPLQDGD

YLLL 0RGHP
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

 /RVFDEOHVGHODIXHQWHGHSRGHUGHEHQVHUJXLDGRVGHWDOPDQHUD
TXHQRVHDQSLVDGRVQLSHOOL]FDGRVSRUREMHWRVFRORFDGRVVREUHR
FRQWUDHOORVSRQLHQGRSDUWLFXODUDWHQFLyQDORVFRQWDFWRV\
UHFHSW FXORVGRQGHVDOHQGHODSDUDWR
 (OHTXLSRHOpFWULFRGHEHVHUOLPSLDGR~QLFDPHQWHGHDFXHUGRD
ODVUHFRPHQGDFLRQHVGHOIDEULFDQWH
 (QFDVRGHH[LVWLUXQDDQWHQDH[WHUQDGHEHUiVHUORFDOL]DGDOHMRV
GHODVOLQHDVGHHQHUJLD
 (OFDEOHGHFRUULHQWHGHEHUiVHUGHVFRQHFWDGRGHOFXDQGRHO
HTXLSRQRVHDXVDGRSRUXQODUJRSHULRGRGHWLHPSR
 &XLGDGRGHEHVHUWRPDGRGHWDOPDQHUDTXHREMHFWRVOLTXLGRVQR
VHDQGHUUDPDGRVVREUHODFXELHUWDXRULILFLRVGHYHQWLODFLyQ
 6HUYLFLRSRUSHUVRQDOFDOLILFDGRGHEHUiVHUSURYLVWRFXDQGR
D (OFDEOHGHSRGHURHOFRQWDFWRKDVLGRGDxDGRX
E 2EMHFWRVKDQFDtGRROtTXLGRKDVLGRGHUUDPDGRGHQWURGHO
DSDUDWRR
F (ODSDUDWRKDVLGRH[SXHVWRDODOOXYLDR
G (ODSDUDWRSDUHFHQRRSHUDUQRUPDOPHQWHRPXHVWUDXQ
FDPELRHQVXGHVHPSHxRR
H (ODSDUDWRKDVLGRWLUDGRRVXFXELHUWDKDVLGRGDxDGD

0RGHP L[
5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

[ 0RGHP
&RQWHQWV

5HJXODWRU\,QIRUPDWLRQ

&KDSWHU,QWURGXFWLRQ
6KHOI0RXQW8QLWV 
)HDWXUHV  
'DWD0RGH  
)D[0RGH 
6RIWZDUH  
&RPPXQLFDWLRQV6RIWZDUH  
&ODVV)D[&RPPXQLFDWLRQV6RIWZDUH 
,QWHUQHW%URZVHU  
'HVFULSWLRQ  
)XQFWLRQDO  
3K\VLFDO 
0RGHP&DUG 

&KDSWHU,QVWDOODWLRQ
0RXQWLQJ$FFHVVRULHV  
(OHFWULFDO,QVWDOODWLRQ 
$&3RZHU&RQQHFWLRQ 
'&3RZHU&RQQHFWLRQ 
'7(&RQQHFWLRQ 
7HOHSKRQH/LQH&RQQHFWLRQ 
'LDO0RGH3671&RQQHFWLRQ ',$/MDFN  
/HDVHG/LQH&RQQHFWLRQ 7(/6(7/($6('/,1(-DFN   
6KHOI0RXQW0'&,QVWDOODWLRQ  

&KDSWHU*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
2SWLRQ6HOHFWLRQ 
3RZHU8S  
3ODFLQJD&DOO  
'LDOLQJZLWKD6WDQGDUG7HOHSKRQH  
$XWRGLDOLQJIURP)URQW3DQHO 
$XWRGLDOLQJIURPD7HUPLQDOZLWKWKH$7&RPPDQGV  
$QVZHULQJD&DOO 
$XWRDQVZHULQJ 

9 [L
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

$QVZHULQJ0DQXDOO\  


$QVZHULQJIURP7HUPLQDOZLWK$7&RPPDQG6HW 
(QGLQJD&DOO 
(QGLQJD&DOO8VLQJWKH)URQW3DQHO  
(QGLQJD&DOOIURPD7HUPLQDOZLWKWKH$7&RPPDQG6HW  
5HDVRQVIRU&DOO7HUPLQDWLRQ  

&KDSWHU)URQW3DQHO2SHUDWLRQ
/(''HVFULSWLRQV 
/&'0HQXV  
/&'0HQX2SHUDWLRQ 
)URQW3DQHO6HFXULW\  

&KDSWHU$7&RPPDQGV
&RPPDQG&DWHJRULHV  
2SHUDWLRQ0RGHV  
2IIOLQH&RPPDQG0RGH 
2QOLQH&RPPDQG0RGH  
'DWD0RGH  
6HQGLQJ&RPPDQGVWRWKH0RGHP  
&UHDWLQJD&RPPDQG6WDWHPHQW$7  
$XWREDXG  
*XLGHOLQHVIRU&UHDWLQJ&RPPDQG6WDWHPHQWV  
0RQLWRU'LVSOD\ 
&RPPDQG6WDWHPHQW%XIIHU  
%DFNVSDFH.H\  
5HSHDWLQJD&RPPDQG$  
1XPEHUHG&RPPDQGV  
*URXS&RPPDQGV 
5HVSRQVH&RPPDQGV  
'LJLW:RUG6HOHFWLRQ9  
5HVSRQVH'LVSOD\V4 
1HJRWLDWLRQ'LVSOD\V:  
3URWRFRO5HVXOW&RGHV?9  
&DOO3URJUHVV&RQQHFW6SHHG0HVVDJHV;  
1XPEHU&RGH$SSOLFDWLRQ 5&  
5HVSRQVH1XPEHU&RGHV0HVVDJHV  
'LDO&RPPDQGV 
'LDOLQJ'  
7RQH'LDOLQJ7 
3XOVH'LDOLQJ3  
,QVHUW/RQJ3DXVH  

[LL 9
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

:DLWIRU6HFRQG'LDO7RQH: 
+RRN)ODVK  
6ZLWFKLQJWR$QVZHU0RGHDIWHU'LDOLQJ5  
5HPDLQLQJLQ&RPPDQG0RGH  
:DLWIRU6HFRQGVRI6LOHQFH# 
'LDOLQJD6WRUHG7HOHSKRQH1XPEHU6Q  
$XWRGLDO1XPEHU/RFDWLRQ $8Q  
9RLFH&DOOV 
6ZLWFKLQJIURP9RLFHWR'DWD  
$QVZHULQJ$&DOO 
0DQXDO$QVZHU  
$7&RPPDQG$QVZHU$  
$XWRDQVZHU6 
&DOOHU,' ,' 
'LVWLQFWLYH5LQJ '5  
7HUPLQDO,QWHUIDFH&RPPDQGV  
'DWD&DUULHU'HWHFW &  
'DWD6HW5HDG\ 6 
'DWD7HUPLQDO5HDG\ '  
6HULDO3RUW5LQJ,QGLFDWRU 3LQ ?5  
5HTXHVWWR6HQG&OHDUWR6HQG 5  
'7(&RQWUROOHG)DOOEDFN5DWH 3LQ  )%  
*HQHUDO&RPPDQGV  
&KDQJLQJIURP'DWD0RGHWR&RPPDQG0RGH  
/RFDO&KDUDFWHU(FKR( 
2QOLQH&KDUDFWHU(FKR)  
+DQJLQJ8S++ 
)DVW'LVFRQQHFW++ 
(3520&KHFN, 
6SHDNHU9ROXPH/  
6SHDNHU&RQWURO0  
5HWXUQ2QOLQH2  
/RQJ6SDFH'LVFRQQHFW<  
9ELV*XDUG7RQHV * 
$V\QFKURQRXV6\QFKURQRXV0RGH6HOHFWLRQ 0  
0DNH%UHDN'LDO3XOVH5DWLR 3 
6\QFKURQRXV7UDQVPLW&ORFN6RXUFH ;  
95DWH6HOHFWLRQ7KUHVKROGV 7+  
9$V\PPHWULF%LW5DWHV $6  
0RGXODWLRQ 00  
0D[LPXP'&(6SHHG% 
0LQLPXP'&(6SHHG/ 
$XWR5HWUDLQ( 
$XWRPDWLF5DWH$GDSWLRQ5  

9 [LLL
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

0DQXDO5DWH$GDSWLRQ 55  


3URGXFW5HYLVLRQ/HYHO9  
2QOLQH4XLFN5HIHUHQFH+  
3URGXFW6HULDO1XPEHU9  
7DON'DWD '$ 
9)DVW7UDLQ )7  
,QFRPLQJ&DOO ,&  
/LQH&XUUHQW'LVFRQQHFW /&  
'LVDEOH$7&RPPDQG6HW 17 
'LDO/LQH7UDQVPLW/HYHO 7'Q  
3ULYDWH/LQH2SHUDWLRQ  
:LUH2SHUDWLRQ  
:LUH2SHUDWLRQ  
'LDO%DFNXS  
'LDO/HDVHG/LQH / 
'LDO%DFNXS '%  
5HWXUQWR/HDVHG/LQHIURP'LDO%DFNXS /%  
0DQXDO'LDO%DFNXS /'  
$QVZHU2ULJLQDWH 25 
/HDVHG/LQH7UDQVPLW/HYHO 7/Q  
&RQILJXUDWLRQ&RPPDQGV  
&RQILJXUDWLRQ3URILOHV  
$FWLYH3URILOH 
6WRUHG3URILOH 
)DFWRU\3URILOH  
6WRULQJD&RQILJXUDWLRQ :  
3RZHUXS2SWLRQ6HW < 
/RDG)DFWRU\2SWLRQV )Q 
5HVHWWR6WRUHG&RQILJXUDWLRQ= 
9LHZ&RQILJXUDWLRQ3URILOHV5HFHLYHG6LJQDO2SWLRQV 9 
6WRULQJD7HOHSKRQH&RPPDQG/LQH =[ Q &1[Q 1' 
5HWDLQLQJ5HVWRULQJ2SWLRQV 52 
6RIW'RZQORDG3DVVZRUG3<  
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ  
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ6HFXULW\ 
5HPRWH6HFXULW\&RGH3   
(QWHULQJ5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ7  7 
(QDEOLQJ'LVDEOLQJ5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ 5$ 
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ'7(6SHHG 5%  
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ)RUPDW 5) 
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ6DYLQJRU'LVFDUGLQJ2SWLRQV 54  

[LY 9
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

&KDSWHU3URWRFROV
&&,779ELV(UURU&RQWURO3URWRFRO  
5HOLDEOH0RGH  
$XWR5HOLDEOH0RGH 
&RQVWDQW6SHHG,QWHUIDFH 
'DWD&RPSUHVVLRQ  
1RUPDO0RGH  
'LUHFW0RGH 
)ORZ&RQWURO  
3URWRFRO&RPPDQGV  
'LVFRQQHFW%XIIHU'HOD\'  
6HULDO3RUW '7( &RQVWDQW6SHHG?-  
92SWLRQDO'HWHFWLRQ3KDVH?0  
2SHUDWLQJ0RGH?1 
$XWR5HOLDEOH)DOOEDFN&KDUDFWHU$Q 
6HULDO3RUW)ORZ&RQWURO?4 
;21;2))3DVV7KURXJK?;  
'DWD/LQN)ORZ&RQWURO?* 
%UHDN&RQWURO?.Q  
,QDFWLYLW\7LPHU?7 
0D[LPXP5HOLDEOH%ORFN6L]H?$ 
7UDQVPLW%UHDN6HW%UHDN/HQJWK?%  
6HW$XWR5HOLDEOH%XIIHU?&  
9ELV'DWD&RPSUHVVLRQ&  

&KDSWHU7HVW0RGH2SHUDWLRQ
7HVW&DWHJRULHV  
7HUPLQDWLQJD7HVWLQ3URJUHVV 7 
7HVWLQJWKH/RFDO0RGHP 
/RFDO$QDORJ/RRSEDFN 7 
/RFDO$QDORJ/RRSEDFNZLWK6HOI7HVW 7  
7HVWLQJWKH5HPRWH0RGHP  
/RFDO'LJLWDO/RRSEDFN 7  
*UDQW'HQ\5'/5HTXHVW 7 7  
5HPRWH'LJLWDO/RRSEDFN 7  
5HPRWH'LJLWDO/RRSEDFNZLWK6HOI7HVW 7 
7HVW3DWWHUQ7  
%LODWHUDO'LJLWDO7HVW(QDEOH'LVDEOH '*  
'7(&RQWUROOHG5HPRWH'LJLWDO/RRSEDFN 3LQ  5'  
'7(&RQWUROOHG/RFDO$QDORJ/RRSEDFN 3LQ  /$  

9 [Y
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

&KDSWHU6HFXULW\
$XWRFDOOEDFN6HFXULW\  
/RZ6HFXULW\2SHUDWLRQ  
2SHUDWLQJZLWKRXW/RZ6HFXULW\  
2SHUDWLQJZLWK/RZ6HFXULW\  
5HPRWH2SHUDWLRQ 
/RFDO2SHUDWLRQ  
3DVVZRUGV  
/&',QGLFDWLRQRI6HFXULW\  
5HVWULFWLRQVLQ6HFXULW\2SHUDWLRQ 
/RZ6HFXULW\&RPPDQGV  
6HW3DVVZRUG6 [  
&KDQJLQJD3DVVZRUG& [\  
'HOHWLQJD3DVVZRUG& [  
6HFXULW\5HVHW'5  
'LVDEOLQJ6HFXULW\' [  
6HFXULW\6WDWXV'"("  
(QDEOLQJ6HFXULW\( [ 
+LJK6HFXULW\ 
&RPSDWLELOLW\ 
&DSDFLW\ 
2SHUDWLQJZLWKRXW+LJK6HFXULW\ 
2SHUDWLQJZLWK+LJK6HFXULW\ 
6HFXULW\/HYHOV 
/HYHO3DVVZRUG2QO\ 
/HYHO3DVVZRUGZLWK&DOOEDFN  
/HYHO3DVVZRUGZLWK&DOOEDFNDQG3DVVZRUG5H(QWU\  
6XSHUXVHU 
3DVVZRUGV  
'HIDXOW3DVVZRUGV  
+LJK6HFXULW\&RPPDQGV  
(QDEOLQJ+LJK6HFXULW\(+ SZ 
'LVDEOLQJ+LJK6HFXULW\'  
6HWWLQJ3DVVZRUGV3Q SZSZ 
6HW6HFXULW\/HYHOV/Q P  
6HW8VHU&DOOEDFN1XPEHU&Q P  
([WHQGHG)HDWXUHV: 
'LVSOD\([WHQGHG)HDWXUH6WDWXV:"  
'LVSOD\5HVHW,OOHJDO$FFHVV$WWHPSW&RXQWHUV
00Q0  
)DFWRU\5HVHW) SZSZ 
5HPRYLQJD8VHU5Q  
6HFXULW\6WDWXV(" 
'LVSOD\8VHU6WDWXV6"  

[YL 9
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

9HULI\8VHU,QIRUPDWLRQ,Q,%Q  


5HTXHVW6XSHUXVHU3ULYLOHJH6 SZ  
/RFDO/RJRQ&RPPDQGQ SZ 
/RFDO/RJRII&RPPDQG  
5HPRWH/RJRQ3URFHGXUHQ SZ 

&KDSWHU)D[2SHUDWLRQ
)D[2SHUDWLRQ  
0RGHP,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ  
)D['HIDXOWV  
)D[$XWRDQVZHU 
)D[$VVRFLDWHG2SWLRQV 
6WRUHG)D[3URILOH 
&ODVV'HWDLOV 
&ODVV&RPPDQGV  
'LDO&RPPDQG' 
$QVZHU&RPPDQG$  
2Q+RRN+  
2II+RRN+ 
&ODVV2SHUDWLRQ)&/$66   
&ODVV2SHUDWLRQ)&/$66   
6HUYLFH&ODVV,QGLFDWLRQ)&/$66"  
6HUYLFH&ODVV&DSDELOLWLHV)&/$66 "  
7UDQVPLW6LOHQFH)76 7LPH   
5HFHLYH6LOHQFH)56 7LPH  
)D[7UDQVPLWDQG5HFHLYH0RGHV  
)DFVLPLOH7UDQVPLW)70 0RG  
)DFVLPLOH5HFHLYH)50 0RG  
+'/&7UDQVPLW)7+ 0RG   
+'/&5HFHLYH)5+ 0RG  
7HVW6XSSRUWHG5DQJHRI9DOXHV)7[ ")5[ "  
&ODVV5HVXOW&RGH)&(5525  
)D[$XWRDQVZHU)$$  
'7($XWREDXGIRU)D[$XWRDQVZHU )5 
%LQDU\)LOH7UDQVIHU  

&KDSWHU6WDWXV5HJLVWHUV
65HJLVWHUV  
65HJLVWHU2SHUDWLRQ6Q"6Q"A  
&KDQJLQJ5HJLVWHU9DOXHV6Q Y6Q AY  
,QGLYLGXDO%LW&RPPDQG6Q Y 
$XWRDQVZHU6 

9 [YLL
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

5LQJ&RXQW6  


(VFDSH&KDUDFWHU6  
(QGRI/LQH&KDUDFWHU6 
/LQH)HHG&KDUDFWHU6 
%DFNVSDFH&KDUDFWHU6  
3DXVH%HIRUH'LDOLQJ6 
3DXVHIRU5LQJEDFNDQG&DUULHU'HWHFWLRQ
:DLWIRUQG'LDO7RQH6  
3DXVH,QWHUYDOIRU&RPPD6 
&DUULHU'HWHFW7LPH6 
/RVW&DUULHU'HWHFW7LPH6 
'70)7RQH'XUDWLRQ6 
(VFDSH6HTXHQFH3DXVH6 
6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
6 
6\VWHP7HVWV6  
6 
7HVW7LPHRXW6 
6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
6 
'756WDWH5HFRJQLWLRQ6  
576&76'HOD\6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
/RRNEDFN7LPHU6  
%LW0DSSHG6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
'75'LDO%DFNXS1XPEHUWR'LDO6 
66  
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ(VFDSH&KDUDFWHU6  
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ*XDUG7LPH6 
6 
;21&KDUDFWHUIURP'7(6  
;2))&KDUDFWHUIURP'7(6 
6 
;21&KDUDFWHUWR'7(6 
;2))&KDUDFWHUWR'7(6  

[YLLL 9
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

'LDO/LQH7UDQVPLW/HYHO6  


/HDVHG/LQH7UDQVPLW/HYHO6 
$XWRPDWLF5DWH$GDSWLRQ7KUHVKROG6 
)ORZ&RQWURO6  
6 
9&RPSUHVVLRQ&RQWURO6  
%LW0DSSHG6 
,QDFWLYLW\7LPHU6 
%UHDN&RQWURO6  
%LW0DSSHG6 
'7(2SWLRQV6  
'LVFRQQHFW%XIIHU'HOD\6  
0D[LPXP7UDQVPLW%ORFN6L]H6  
$XWR5HOLDEOH)DOOEDFN&KDUDFWHU6 
6 
/LQN6SHHG6WDWXV6 
6 
'&(,QGHSHQGHQW6SHHG6  
2SHUDWLQJ0RGH6 
2SHUDWLQJ0RGH6WDWXV6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
3DVVZRUG7LPHRXW6  
&DOOEDFN'HOD\6  
&DOOEDFN5HWU\6 
&DOOEDFN5HWU\'HOD\6  
/RFNRXW7KUHVKROG6  
$XWRFDOOEDFN7LPHU6 
%UHDN/HQJWK6  
6HULDO3RUWRU'7(6SHHG6  
0LQLPXP'&(6SHHG6  
1HJRWLDWLRQ6WDWXV6  
6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
66  
0RGXODWLRQ7\SH6  
66  
&XUUHQW0RGXODWLRQ6  
66  
96HWWLQJV6 
9$V\PPHWULF6HWWLQJV6 
%LW0DSSHG6 
66  

9 [L[
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

&KDSWHU9ELV$XWRGLDOHU
$XWRGLDOHU&RPPDQG6WULQJVDQG3DUDPHWHUV  
6RIWZDUH*XLGHOLQHV  
,QYDOLG5HVSRQVHV 
'LDO3DUDPHWHUV  
9ELV&RPPDQGVDQG5HVSRQVHV  
'LDO&RPPDQG&51QQQ  
3URJUDP1XPEHU&RPPDQG351DQQQ 
,QWHUPHGLDWH&DOO3URJUHVV5HVSRQVH  
'LDO6WRUHG1XPEHU&56D  
5HTXHVW/LVWRI6WRUHG1XPEHUV5/1 
'LVUHJDUG,QFRPLQJ&DOO',&  
&RQQHFW,QFRPLQJ&DOO&,&  
5HGLDO/DVW1XPEHU&55Q 
/LQN1XPEHUE\$GGUHVV35/DE  
5HTXHVW/LVWRI/LQNHG1XPEHUV5//  
5HTXHVW/LVWRI9HUVLRQ5/9 
02'(0237,216&200$1'352[[[\\ 
6DYH&XUUHQW6HWWLQJV35.  
5HVWRUH)DFWRU\6HWWLQJV353Q 
5HTXHVW/LVWRI6WRUHG2SWLRQV5/2[[[\\  
2SWLRQV  

&KDSWHU0DLQWHQDQFH
*HQHUDO  
)XVH5HSODFHPHQW  
0DLQWHQDQFH  
&DOOLQJ7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUW  

$SSHQGL[$6SHFLILFDWLRQV
6L]H  $
(QYLURQPHQWDO&RQGLWLRQV $
3RZHU5HTXLUHPHQWV $
7HOHSKRQH/LQH  $
'LJLWDO,QWHUIDFH $
0RGHP'DWD5DWHV  $
)D[5DWHV  $
0RGXODWLRQV $
)D[0RGXODWLRQ  $
,QWHUQDO7UDQVPLW&ORFN)UHTXHQF\ $
([WHUQDO7UDQVPLW&ORFN)UHTXHQF\ $
7UDQVPLW2XWSXW/HYHO $

[[ 9
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

2SHUDWLRQ  $


&DUULHU'HWHFW/HYHO  $
7HOFR&RQQHFWLRQ $
7HVWLQJ  $
/LQH(TXDOL]DWLRQ $
576&76'HOD\  $
/LQN/D\HU3URWRFROV  $

$SSHQGL[%3KRQH-DFN'HVFULSWLRQV
',$/3LQ)XQFWLRQV  %
7(/6(7/($6('/,1(3LQ)XQFWLRQV %

$SSHQGL[&+DUGZDUH2SWLRQV
-XPSHU2SWLRQ6HOHFWLRQ  &
5HPRYLQJWKH&RYHU &
*URXQG2SWLRQ-XPSHU  &
5HSODFLQJWKH&RYHU  &

$SSHQGL[')DXOW,VRODWLRQ3URFHGXUH
)DXOW,VRODWLRQ3URFHGXUH  '
7HOHSKRQH,QWHUIDFH  '
6WDQGDUG3KRQH '
0RGHPDQG7HOHSKRQH/LQH&KHFN '

$SSHQGL[(&RPPDQG,QGH[DQG'HIDXOWV
*HQHUDO (
&DOOHU,'&RPPDQGV(
'LVWLQFWLYH5LQJ&RPPDQGV(
)D[&RPPDQGV(
&ODVV&RPPDQGV9DOLGLQ2QO\)D[0RGH (
6HFXULW\&RPPDQGV(
5HPRWH&RQILJXUDWLRQ&RPPDQGV (
6WDWXV5HJLVWHUV (
9ELV'LDOHU&RPPDQGV(
95HVSRQVH0HVVDJHV(
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HWV(
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW(
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW(
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW 6\QFKURQRXV'LDOXS  $7 )  (
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW(

9 [[L
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV

)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW $V\QFKURQRXVZLUH/HDVHG/LQH
ZLWK9ELV3URWRFRO  $7 )  (
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW $V\QFKURQRXVZLUH/HDVHG/LQH
ZLWKRXW9ELV3URWRFRO  $7 )  (
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW 6\QFKURQRXVZLUH/HDVHG/LQH
1RUPDO2ULJLQDWH  $7 ) (
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW 6\QFKURQRXVZLUH/HDVHG/LQH
)RUFHG$QVZHU  $7 ) (
)DFWRU\2SWLRQ6HW 6\QFKURQRXV9ELV'LDOHU  $7 )  (

$SSHQGL[)$6&,,DQG(%&',&&KDUDFWHUV

$SSHQGL[*$EEUHYLDWLRQVDQG$FURQ\PV

$SSHQGL[+)ODVK8SJUDGH
:KDW<RX1HHG  +
6WHSV)RU'RZQORDGLQJ +
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ +

6HUYLFHDQG6XSSRUW

,QGH[

[[LL 9
Chapter 1
Introduction

The Modem 3600 provides synchronous, asynchronous, and fax


capabilities for data communications or facsimile links between a local
computer and a remote computer, fax, or data terminal equipment (DTE)
located anywhere a standard or cellular telephone can reach. Data can be
transmitted over standard dial-up lines, private leased telephone lines, or
wireless communication.
The Modem 3600 communicates at standard data rates up to 33,600 bps
with compatible modems connected to similarly equipped computers,
computer services, and data bases. Advanced error control and data
compression ensure data integrity and increase data throughput.
When used with a Class 1 Fax software package, the modem can exchange
fax documents at data rates up to 14,400 bps with any Group 3 fax
machine or PC with a fax modem.
A high-level security feature allows secure operation of the modem, both
locally and remotely.

Shelf-Mount Units
This User’s Guide supports the desktop and shelf-mount versions of the
Modem 3600. Operation and function are generally the same for both, but
when there is a difference, the information primarily supports the desktop
unit. Installation for each version is described in Chapter 2.

Modem 3600 1-1


Introduction

Features
The Modem 3600 is a flexible telecommunications tool that offers the
following standard features.

Data Mode
• Full-duplex operation on two-wire public connections or two-wire
or four-wire private telephone connections with two-wire public
automatic or manual backup
• 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200,
21600, 24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps DCE data rates
• Compatible with these standards:
CCITT V.34
CCITT V.33
CCITT V.32 bis
CCITT V.32
CCITT V.29
CCITT V.27
CCITT V.22 bis
CCITT V.22
CCITT V.21
CCITT V.13
Bell 212A
Bell 103
• Compatible with a variety of software packages
• Synchronous operation at all DCE data rates except Bell 103 300
and V.23
• Asynchronous operation at all DTE data rates up to 230.4 kbps
• CCITT V.42 bis and MNP level 5 data compression
• CCITT V.42 and MNP 4 error control protocol
• LCD configuration and status for easy operation
• Front panel lockout
• Autodial and Autoanswer capability
• Autobaud DTE rate and character format selection
• AT command set
• V.25 bis autodialer
• Configuration memory
• Phone number storage

1-2 Modem 3600


Introduction

• Caller ID
• Distinctive ring
• Multiple levels of security with auto callback and password
protection and up to 50 users
• Automatic speed matching to originating modem
• Remote configuration using command mode or LCD
• Built-in standard diagnostics for testing phone line quality and
modems at each end
• Flash upgrades

Fax Mode
• Fax speeds to 14.4 kbps
• HDLC framing to allow T.30 Error Correction Mode
• Standard Class 1 interface conforms to EIA-578
• Group 3 compatibility: CCITT V.21 Channel 2, V.27 ter, V.29,
V.17
• Autoanswer under software control
• Automatic fax/data detection

Software
Software operates the features of the Modem 3600.

Communications Software
You must have communications software to transfer data. After
installing the modem, consult your communications software user's
manual for information on the software, commands, and features.

Class 1 Fax Communications Software


For sending faxes, a Class 1 fax software package is required.

Internet Browser
To connect to the Internet, Internet browser software is required.

Modem 3600 1-3


Introduction

Description
Functional
The Modem 3600 processes serial asynchronous data from a DTE at all
standard rates from 300 bps to 230.4 kbps*, and serial synchronous data
at rates from 300 to 33.6 kbps. Transmission can be over either dial-up
lines or either two- or four-wire leased lines. The maximum line speed is
33.6 kbps. Built-in test features can determine system performance and
isolate faults in the data link. Operation and configuration are controlled
by the front panel LCD, the AT command set, or the V.25 bis command
set.
*The 230.4 kbps DTE speed is available, but the Modem 3600 will not
autobaud to 230.4 kbps. With the modem set for 115.2 kbps, enter
AT\J2 to enable the speed and enter AT\J3 to disable it.

Physical
The Modem 3600 has a 32 character LCD front panel with three
pushbuttons for option selection (Figure 1-1).

Modem 3600

Figure 1-1. Typical Front Panel

1-4 Modem 3600


Introduction

The Modem 3600 rear panel has an EIA-232 DTE connector, an 8-pin
TELSET/LEASED LINE jack, an 8-pin DIAL jack, the power switch,
fuse, and cord (Figure 1-2).

TELSET
LEASED LINE DIAL

Figure 1-2. Rear Panel (115 Vac Model)

Modem 3600 1-5


Introduction

Modem 3600 Card


The shelf-mount Modem 3600 unit (Figur e1-3) has edge connectors
that insert into the shelf backplane. The shelf backplane performs the
same functions as the standalone rear panel. Refer to the “Shelf-Mount
MD1000C Installation” on page 10.

Figure 1-3. Card Version of the Modem 3600

1-6 Modem 3600


Chapter 2
Installation

This chapter provides information on mechanical and electrical


installation of the modem.

Mounting Accessories
We have included both self-adhesive feet and an adhesive-backed hook
and loop fastener. The feet are for use when the module will be resting on
a surface; the hook and loop is useful when mounting the modem to a PC
or monitor housing or other flat surface.
To install the feet, peel them from the paper backing and place one foot at
each corner of the bottom of the module. To use the hook and loop
fastener, peel the plastic backing from one side and stick to the bottom of
the module; peel the backing from the remaining piece and press the
module firmly to the mounting surface.Once installed using the hook and
loop fastener, the module may be removed from the mounting surface by
grasping the unit and pulling firmly away from the mounting surface. To
re-mount, align the hook and loop halves and press firmly together.

Modem 3600 2-1


Installation

Electrical Installation
The rear panel (Figure 2-1) includes DTE cable and telephone line
connectors.

TELSET
LEASED LINE DIAL

Figure 2-1. Rear Panel Connections (115 Vac Model)

AC Power Connection
Power is supplied through a 6-foot line cord with a grounded 3-wire
plug.

DC Power Connection

Caution
To protect the DC-to-DC converter from damage,
ensure the positive and negative leads are properly
connected.
If the modem is equipped for 12-60 VDC power input, connect the
power to the terminal block attached to the modem back panel. A
chassis ground connection is also supplied on the terminal block.
If the modem is equipped for +/- 12/+5 VDC power input, connect the
VDC power to the amp connector. A chassis ground connection is also
supplied on the terminal block.

DTE Connection
The DTE connector is a 25-pin D-series type conforming to EIA-232
specifications. You must use a shielded DTE cable to comply with EMC
requirements. Pin signals are shown in Figure 2-2 and are described in
Table 2-1.

2-2 Modem 3600


Installation

Figure 2-2. Digital Interface Signals

Modem 3600 2-3


Installation

Table 2-1. Pin Signal Description s


EIA- CCITT
Pin 232D V.24 Signal Description
1 101 Shield No connection
2 BA 103 Trans- Serial digital data (to be
mitted modulated) from a data terminal or
Data other digital data source:
Synchronous data must be
accompanied by the modem
transmit clock (pin 15) or by an
external data rate clock (pin 24).
Data transitions should occur on
positive-going clock transitions;
asynchronous data does not
require a transmit clock.
3 BB 104 Receive Serial digital data output to the
d Data DTE interface: Sync data is
accompanied by an internal data
rate (receive) clock (pin 17) that
has positive-going transitions on
the data transition. Async data
does not require a receive clock.
4 CA 105 Request A positive level to the modem
to Send when data transmission is desired
5 CB 106 Clear to A positive level from the modem
Send in response to Request to Send and
when the modem is ready to
transmit. *
6 CC 107 Data Set A positive level from the modem
Ready when power is on and ready to
operate: In dial-up operation, the
modem must be off hook to give a
high DSR signal.*
** Modem options may force these signals on or cause them to be ignored.
*** Refer to Appendix C, Hardware Options.
*† This function can be disabled or its logic sense reversed by hardware straps.

2-4 Modem 3600


Installation

Table 2-1. Pin Signal Descriptions (Continued)


EIA- CCITT
Pin 232D V.24 Signal Description
7 AB 102 Signal Signal or common signal and dc
Ground power ground. **
8 CF 109 Receive A positive level from the modem
d Line indicating the presence of a
Signal received signal (carrier detect). *
Detector
9 -- +12 +12 voltage reference
Volts
10 -- -12 Volts -12 voltage reference
11 -- Signal This circuit indicates probability
Quality of errors in the received data: a
Indicator positive level indicates poor signal
quality while a negative level
indicates good signal quality. †
15 DB 114 Trans- A transmit data rate clock output
mit for use by an external data source:
Clock Positive clock transitions
(DCE) correspond to data transitions.
17 DD 115 Receive A receive data rate clock output
Clock for use by an external data sink:
Positive clock transitions
correspond to data transitions.
18 -- 141 Local A positive level causes the modem
Loop- to enter the local analog loopback
back test mode.*
** Modem options may force these signals on or cause them to be ignored.
*** Refer to Appendix C, Hardware Options.
*† This function can be disabled or its logic sense reversed by hardware straps.

Modem 3600 2-5


Installation

Table 2-1. Pin Signal Descriptions (Continued)


EIA- CCITT
Pin 232D V.24 Signal Description
20 CD 108.2 Data This circuit is positive when the
Termi- DTE is ready to originate or
nal answer a call in dial-up operation.
Ready DTR must always be active (high)
in 2-wire private line operation.
Cycling DTR causes retraining.*
21 -- 140 Remote A positive level causes a digital
Digital loopback test mode at the remote
Loop- modem.*
back
22 CE 125 Ring In direct dial operation this circuit
Indicator is positive in response to an
incoming ring signal.*
23 CH 111 Data Supplies a data rate control input
Rate to select primary or fallback data
Select rate: Negative voltage selects
primary data rate and positive
voltage selects fallback data rate.*
24 DA 113 External A serial data rate clock input from
Trans- the data source. Positive clock
mit transitions correspond to data
Clock transitions.
25 -- 142 Test Indicates the modem is in a test
Mode mode.
** Modem options may force these signals on or cause them to be ignored.
*** Refer to Appendix C, Hardware Options.
*† This function can be disabled or its logic sense reversed by hardware straps.

Telephone Line Connection


The modem operates in these line-related modes:
• Dial
• Leased

2-6 Modem 3600


Installation

Dial Mode: PSTN Connection (DIAL jack)


The public switched telephone network (PSTN) is a two-wire dial
network. Modems are registered with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) for direct connection to the PSTN. The label on the
chassis bottom gives the FCC registration number and other information
required for network operation.
Direct connection to the PSTN is shown in Figure 2-3.

DTE Connector
8-pin Screws
Connectors

TELSET
DIAL
LEASED LINE

DTE

Cable supplied EIA-232


with telephone 25-Pin Connector
to DTE

Shielded DTE Cable

RJ11C jack installed


by telephone company

Use 8-pin Modular (at modem end) to 6-pin


Modular (at RJ11 wall jack end) connector.
Notes:
1. The TELSET jack is provided on the back of the modem for use with a
standard rotary or tone dial telephone regardless of the telephone
jack arrangement ordered from the telephone company.
2. This standard rotary or tone dial telephone set can be used for
originating a call or for voice communication. For sites requiring
only auto answer capability, a phone is not needed.
3. For connector pin-outs, refer to Appendix B.

Figure 2-3. Dial-up Connection (115 Vac Model)

Modem 3600 2-7


Installation

Leased Line Connection (TELSET/LEASED LINE Jack)


Private or leased lines use four-wire or two-wire lines. In this mode, the
user configures the unit for four-wire or two-wire operation, depending
on the private line service used.
The telephone company will install the leased line and wall jack at your
site. The line connects to the modem at the 8-position TELSET/
LEASED LINE jack.
Figure 2-4 shows a typical modem hookup for operation over private
leased lines with dial backup.

2-8 Modem 3600


Installation

Dial
Telset Leased (May be used for
Line Jack Dial Backup)

TELSET
DIAL
LEASED LINE

DTE

EIA-232
25-Pin Connector
Leased Line to DTE
Cable

Leased Line
Jack

RJ11C
Use 8-pin Modular (at modem end) to 6-pin
Modular (at RJ11 wall jack end) connector.
(Optional connection for dial backup use.)

Notes:
1. Set the transmit output level to 0dBm.
2. DTR, which is the signal on pin 20 of the DTE interface, must be active
or the option DTE IGNORED must be set for 2-wire OR 4-wire leased line operation.
3. The connection shown includes dial backup. Connect only the leased-line jack
to the modem's Telset jack for regular Leased-line use.
4. For a 2-wire Leased-line connection, Pins 1 and 2 of the Leased-line connection
are used for Tx and Rx data. For a 4-wire Leased-line connection, Pins 1 and 2 are
used for Tx, and Pins 7 and 8 are used for Rx.
5. For connector pin-outs, refer to Appendix B.

Figure 2-4. Leased Line Connection (115 Vac Model)

Modem 3600 2-9


Installation

Shelf-Mount MD1000C Installation


Go to Appendix C, Hardware Options to check the board options before
installation.
Shelf-mount Modem 3600 cards should be installed or replaced by
personnel familiar with shelf-mount installation. The unit has an edge
connector that inserts into a receptacle located on the backplane and
power bus.
Note
Figure 2-5 represents a typical dialup connection using one of
the most common rack shelves. Connect cables as appropriate
for any compatible shelf.

RJ11C, RJ45S or
RJ11C jack,installed
RJ41S jack installed
by telephone
company

To DTE

Shelf backplane
(with MD1000C
(with RM16M installed)
V.3600 installed)

Figure 2-5. MD1000C Connections

2-10 Modem 3600


Chapter 3
Getting Started

Option Selection
There are six ways to change or select options:
• LCD - Using the front panel LCD and pushbuttons is simple,
straightforward, and requires the least amount of technical
background. Chapter 4 explains LCD operation.
• AT Commands - The AT command set can be used to select modem
options. Chapter 5 describes AT commands.
• Status Registers - A series of special ATS commands allows the
operator to change the decimal or hexadecimal value of a memory
byte to change one or more options in that byte. Chapter 10
describes S-registers.
• Single Bit Status Registers - A second series of special ATS
commands allows the user to change single bits within a byte to
change an option. Chapte r10 also explains single bit control.
• Software Program - A wide variety of software programs is
available, or advanced computer users can write their own software
programs to interact with the modem. This manual does not discuss
software programs.
• V.25 bis Commands - An extended set ofV.25 commands allows
selection of modem options during synchronous operation. Refer to
Chapter 11.

Power-Up
A power-up procedure is not required. Turn on the modem using the ON/
OFF power switch on the rear panel. The modem is factory configured to
operate in most public switched telephone applications. If you have stored
a desired option set it will automatically be restored at power-up.

Modem 3600 3-1


Getting Started

Placing a Call
There are three methods for placing a call:

Dialing with a Standard Telephone


1) Lift the telephone receiver. Wait for the dial tone.
2) Dial the number of the remote site.
3) When the answer back tone is heard, immediately press the
TALK/DATA button and hang up the telephone. The modems go
through a connection sequence and establish a data link. If a data
link is not established, return to Step 1.
4) After the link is established, hang up the telephone.

Autodialing from Front Panel


1) If the number to be dialed has not been stored, advance to Main
Menu #6, CHANGE PHONE NUMBER.
2) Enter the number by using the NO pushbutton to scroll the menu
and YES to select.
3) After the number is entered, press YES to store the number.
4) Advance the LCD to Main Menu #2, DIAL STORED
NUMBER.
5) Select the number to dial and press YES. The number is dialed,
and the modems follow the same process as two telephones.

Autodialing from a Terminal with the AT Commands


To dial a number, for example 555-1212, type AT D 555-1212 and
press Enter, or enter ATDSn where n equals one of the stored telephone
number locations 1-9.
The modem dials the number--either pulse or tone, whichever is
currently in effect--and takes the role of the originate modem.
Refer to the “Dial Commands” section on p age5-13 for additional
dialing commands.

3-2 Modem 3600


Getting Started

Answering a Call
There are three ways to answer a call:

Autoanswering
Normally the modem is configured to autoanswer on the first ring. If a
telephone is plugged into the TELSET/LEASED LINE jack, it will also
ring.

Answering Manually
When detecting a ring, the modem LCD displays ringing status.
Press TALK/DATA to answer the call and place the modem in the data
mode.

Answering from Terminal with AT Command Set


The modem displays the ring response.
To answer a call, type ATA. The modem sends an answer-back tone and
attempts to connect to the remote modem.

Ending a Call
There are two ways to complete a call:

Ending a Call Using the Front Panel


1) Press the TALK/DATA pushbutton. DO YOU WANT TO
DISCONNECT will be displayed.
2) Answer YES.

Ending a Call from a Terminal with the AT Command


Set
1) Enter +++ and the modem will enter command mode.
2) Enter ATH and the modem will terminate the call.

Modem 3600 3-3


Getting Started

Reasons for Call Termination


The conditions described in Table 3-1 cause call termination.

Table 3-1. Reasons for Call Terminatio n


Condition Description
Abort Disconnect Default 30 sec; select 1 to 255 sec
(No answer, busy sig- (S-register 7).
nal, no modem, etc.)
ATH Disconnect command.
Loss of Carrier Select 100 ms to 25.5 sec (S-register 10).
Disconnect
Receive Long Space Disabled or select 2 sec.
Disconnect
DTR Disconnect Disabled or select 10 ms to 2.55 sec
(S-register 25).
Loss of Line Current
Cleardown A disconnect method used inV.32 andV.34
mode.
LCD Display When TALK/DATA is pressed, the LCD
displays DO YOU WANT TO GO TO
TALK? When YES is pressed modem hangs
up, if no telephone is connected or if the
connected telephone is not off hook. Pressing
NO displays DO YOU WANT TO
DISCONNECT? Press YES to disconnect.
Train Timeout Modem fails to establish communication
with remote site. Default is 30 seconds
(S-register 7).
Protocol Link Reliable mode only; failure to establish
Establishment Failure reliable link.
Inactivity Timeout Default is 0 or disabled; select for disabled or
1 to 255 minutes (S-register 8).
Protocol Retry Limit 12 retransmissions of the frame.
Exceeded

3-4 Modem 3600


Getting Started

Table 3-1. Reasons for Call Termination (Continued)


Condition Description
Minimum DCE Speed A connection occurred at a rate less than
minimum.
Security Password Maximum password entry attempts
Failure exceeded.
Security Callback Security callback is enabled and a new
remote connection is established. The modem
disconnects and places a call to the
programmed number.
Signal Quality Leased line operation with dial backup
enabled; extended loss of carrier or 4
unsuccessful retrains in 3 minutes causes dial
backup.
Test Mode entered Certain test modes require call termination.
Modem power is
turned off.

Modem 3600 3-5


Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation

The liquid-crystal display (LCD) front panel provides easy real-time


access to modem configuration and status. You can use the LCD at any
time to modify modem options or to get information about modem
operation and status. All of the major modem options can be controlled
through the LCD interface without an external terminal or phone line
connection. Operation of the LCD can be secured using a password
protection feature. A remote modem can even be configured using the
local LCD, through the use of the front panel remote configuration feature.

LED Descriptions
The Modem 3600 LED indicator functions are as follows:
• TR (Terminal Ready). TR lights when the DTE asserts Data
Terminal Ready. This signal is input on pin 20 (CCITT V.24/108.2).
• CS (Clear to Send). CS lights when the modem is ready to send data
to the DTE. This signal is output on pin 5 (CCITT V.24/106).
• RS (Request to Send). RS lights when the DTE is ready to send data
to the modem. This signal is input on pin 4 (CCITT V.24/105).
• CD (Carrier Detect). CD lights when the received audio carrier
signal is detected or, if enabled, when error control protocol
negotiation is complete. This signal is output on pin 8
(CCITT V.24/109).
• RD (Received Data). RD lights for a data space condition at the
receive data output, indicating receive data output activity. This
signal is output on pin 3 (CCITT V.24/104).
• TD (Transmit Data) TD lights for a data space condition at the
transmit data input, indicating transmit data input activity. This
signal is input on pin 2 (CCITTV.24/103).

Modem 3600 4-1


Front Panel Operation

LCD Menus
The Modem 3600 has seven main LCD menus that support modem
operations. Table 4-1 lists them, in the following sequence:
• MODEM STATUS
• DIAL STORED NUMBER
• DISPLAY STATUS
• SELECT TEST
• MODIFY CONFIGURATION
• CHANGE PHONE NUMBERS
• FRONT PANEL FEATURES

LCD Menu Operation


The LCD menu is shown in Tabl e4-1, as follows:
• The first column lists the seven main menu categories.
• The second column is the submenus, listing functions for each
category in the main menu.
• The third column lists specific items for submenu functions.
• The fourth column lists option choices or status for the specific
items in the third column.
• The fifth and sixth columns in the table show associated AT
commands and S-registers as a cross reference.
Each column item has a corresponding header in the previous column. If
an option setting is selected or if all settings have been scrolled through,
the display returns to the header.
Because of the menu structure and option choices, not all main menus
use all four columns in Tabl e4-1. However, option selection and
sequence are the same.
While operating in the option menu, pressing NO scrolls vertically
down the columns; pressing YES advances horizontally across the
columns. However, responding to the LCD prompt is the best way to
reach an option. If NO is pressed and held, the LCD scrolls through the
menus. Press the TALK/DATA button to return to the previous menu.

4-2 Modem 3600


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selectio n


S-
Main Menu LCD Messages Reg
1 MODEM- V.34 33600 IDLE (Press NO to advance to S91
STATUS Shows the current modulation, bit MAIN 2) S67
rate, and modem status.
S-
Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Item Option AT Com. Reg
2 DIAL DIAL #1-9 YES, NO DSn ---
STORED- (n=1-9)
NUMBER?
3 DISPLAY DTE QM ON/OFF DISPLAY --- ---
STATUS? SIGNALS DSR ON/OFF STATUS
(status only) OH ON/OFF
RI ON/OFF
PROTOCOL* NONE DISPLAY --- ---
MNP 2, 3, 4, 5 STATUS
LAPM
COMPRES- NONE DISPLAY --- ---
SOR* MNP 5, V.42b STATUS
CARRIER RECEIVE LEVEL DISPLAY --- ---
DESCRIP- NEAR END STATUS
TIONS* ECHO
LEVEL
FAR END ECHO
LEVEL
FAR END ECHO
DELAY
FREQUENCY
TRANSLATION
BAUD RATE
RX BIT RATE
TX BIT RATE
LAST DIS- DISPLAY I5
CONNECT STATUS
REASON
4 SELECT (Offline test LOCAL ANALOG INITIATE, &T1 S16
TEST? only) LOOP EXIT
LOCAL ANALOG INITIATE, &T8 S16
LOOP WITH TP EXIT
(Online test) LOCAL DIGITAL INITIATE, &T3 S16
LOOP † EXIT

* When modem is not online, the display flashes and shows the status from the
last connection.
† Modem must be online with protocols disabled.

Modem 3600 4-3


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)


Item AT S-
Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Option Com. Reg
4, SELECT (Online test REMOTE INITIATE, &T6 S16
TEST? continued) DIGITAL LOOP † EXIT
c (continued) REMOTE DIGI INITIATE, &T7 S16
o TAL LOOP WITH EXIT
n TP †
t.
TEST PATTERN† INITIATE, %T ---
EXIT
5 MODIFY CHANGE CHANGE 2 WIRE/ &L1, S27
CONFIGU- MODEM LEASED/ DIAL 4 WIRE &L
RATION? OPTIONS? LINE? AUTO- *MM S88
CHANGE MODE *MM1
MODULATION? V.21 *MM2
BELL 103 *MM4
B212A *MM5
V.22 bis *MM6
V.27 ter * *MM8
V.29 * *MM10
V.33 * *MM11
V.32bis *MM12
V.34
CHANGE MAX 33600 %B18 S69
DCE RATE? 31200 %B17
28800 %B16
26400 %B15
24000 %B14
21600 %B13
19200 %B12
16800 %B11
600 %B10
14400 %B9
12000 %B8
7200 %B7
9600 %B6
9600U ** %B5
4800 %B4
2400 %B3
1200 %B2
300 %B1
DTE SPEED %B

*Lease line only.


** 9600U is only valid for V.32 bis modulation.
† Modem must be online with protocols disabled.

4-4 Modem 3600


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)


Submenu Item AT S-
Main Menu Submenu Item Option Com. Reg
5 MODIFY CHANGE CHANGE MIN 33600 %L18 S69
CONFIGU- MODEM DCE RATE? 31200 %L17
c RATION? OPTIONS? 28800 %L16
o (continued) (continued) 26400 %L15
n 24000 %L14
t. 21600 %L13
19200 %L12
16800 %L11
600 %L10
14400 %L9
12000 %L8
7200 %L7
9600 %L6
9600U ** %L5
4800 %L4
2400 %L3
1200 %L2
300 %L1
DTE SPEED %L
CHANGE V.34 LOW BER *TH ---
RATE THRESH- MED BER *TH1
OLD? HIGH BER *TH2
V.34 ASYM ENABLE *AS1 S96
RATES DISABLE *AS
NORMAL NORMAL *OR S14
ORIGINATE ORIG.
FORCED FORCED *OR1
ANSWER* ANS.
V.22 GUARD DISABLE &G S23
TONE 550 Hz &G1
1800 Hz &G2
V.32 FAST TRAIN ENABLE *FT1 S29
DISABLE *FT
AUTO RETRAIN ENABLE %E1 S60
DISABLE %E
SQ AUTO RATE HIGH BER %R3 S53
MED BER %R2
LOW BER %R1
DISABLED %R
TRANSMIT INTERNAL &X S27
CLOCK EXTERNAL &X1
SELECT RECEIVE &X2

*Lease line only.


** 9600U is only valid for V.32 bis modulation.

Modem 3600 4-5


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)


Item AT S-
Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Option Com. Reg
5 MODIFY CHANGE DIAL TRANSMIT -9 dBm to *TDn S51
CONFIGU- MODEM LEVEL -21 dBm
c RATION? OPTIONS?
o (continued) (continued)
n RING ENABLE *RL1 --
t. FREQUENCY *RL
DISABLE
LIMIT
LEASE TRANS- 0 to -21 dBm *TLn S52
MIT LEVEL*
LINE CURRENT OFF *LC, S32
DISCONNECT† SHORT *LC1,
LONG *LC2
LONG SPACE ENABLE Y1 S21
DISCONNECT† DISABLE Y
DIAL BACKUP* MANUAL *DB S32
AUTO- *DB1
MATIC
LOOKBACK 0 DIS- --- S28
TIME* ABLED
to 255
MINUTES
CHANGE LAPM ENABLE \N4, \N5, S70
PROTOCOL PROTOCOL \N6, \N7
OPTIONS? DISABLE \N, \N1,
\N2, \N3
MNP ENABLE \N2, \N3, S70
PROTOCOL \N6, \N7
DISABLE \N, \N1,
\N4, \N5
PROTOCOL ENABLE \N3, \N5, S70
FALLBACK \N6, \N7
DISABLE \N, \N1,
\N2, \N4
DATA COMPRES- DISABLE %C S56
SION NORM %C1
TX %C2
RX %C3

* Lease line only.


† Dial line only.

4-6 Modem 3600


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)


Item AT S-
Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Option Com. Reg
5 MODIFY CHANGE DTE SPEED DTE=DCE \J1 S70
CONFIGU- PROTOCOL CONSTANT \J
c RATION? OPTIONS? DTE
o (continued) (continued) DTE FLOW DISABLE \Q S54
n CONTROL XON/XOFF \Q1
t. CTS \Q2
RTS/CTS \Q3
DCE FLOW CON- DISABLE \Q4 S54
TROL XON/XOFF \Q5
CTS \Q6, \Q7
XON/XOFF PASS ENABLE \X1 S54
THROUGH DISABLE \X
INACTIVITY OFF, 15, 30, \TLn S58
TIMER 45, 60, 75, 90
MIN
BREAK 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 \K, \K1, S59
OPTION \K2, \K3,
\K4, \K5
V.42 FAST ENABLE \M1 S70
DETECT DISABLE \M
CHANGE DTE DATA SYNC &M1, 2, 3, S27
OPTIONS? OPERATION 4, 5, 6
ASYNC &M S30
DTE RATE 300, --- S80
(Async) 600,1200,
2400, 4800,
7200, 9600,
12000,
14400,
16800,
19200,
21600,
24000,
26400,
28800,
31200
33600
38400
57600,
115200
CHAR SIZE 7 BIT --- S61
(Async) 8 BIT
PARITY (Async) NO, EVEN, --- S61
ODD

Modem 3600 4-7


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)


Item AT S-
Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Option Com. Reg
5 MODIFY CHANGE DTE DIAL METHOD ASYNC &M1, S27
CONFIGU- OPTIONS? DTR, &M2 S30
c RATION? (continued) MANUAL, &M3
o (continued) V.25 &M4
n BISYNC,
t. V.25 SDLC &M5
V.25 bis &M6
ASYNC
AT COMMAND ENABLE *NT1 S29
SET DISABLE *NT
CHARACTER ASCII, --- S30
TYPE (V.25 only) EBCDIC
SDLC DATA NRZ, NRZI --- S30
FORMAT
DTR STATE IGNORE &D S21
RECALL &D1
CMD
DISCON- &D2
NECT
RESET &D3
DSR STATE NORMAL &S1 S21
FORCED &S
HIGH
OFF 5 SEC &S2
ON
DISCON-
NECT
FOLLOWS &S3
OH
DCD STATE NORMAL &C1 S21
FORCED &C
HIGH
OFF 5 SEC &C2
ON
DISCON-
NECT
FOLLOWS &C3
REMOTE
RTS
CTS STATE NORMAL &R S21
FORCED &R1
HIGH &R2 S72
CTS
FOLLOWS
DCD
CTS=RTS &R9

4-8 Modem 3600


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)


Item AT S-
Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Option Com. Reg
5 MODIFY CHANGE DTE RTS/CTS DELAY 0 to 150 ms --- S26
CONFIGU- OPTIONS? (10 ms)
c RATION? (continued) DTE COM- ENABLE *FB1 S53
o (continued) MANDED DISABLE *FB
n FALLBACK
t.
OPTIONS RES/ RESTORED *RO1 S29
RETND AT DISC RETAINED *RO
CHANGE BILATERAL ENABLE *DG1 S34
TEST DIGITAL LOOP DISABLE *DG
OPTIONS? DTE LOCAL ENABLE *LA1 S34
TEST DISABLE *LA
DTE REMOTE ENABLE *RD1, S34
TEST DISABLE *RD
REMOTE COM- ENABLE &T4 S23
MANDED DISABLE &T5
TEST TIMEOUT OFF, 60, 120, --- S18
180. 240 SEC
CHANGE DIAL TYPE PULSE, P, T S14
DIAL TONE
OPTIONS? AUTODIAL # OFF, 1 - 9 *AUn ---
(n=1-9)
DIAL TONE BLIND X, X1, X3 S22
DIAL X2, X4
WAIT FOR
DIAL
TONE
WAIT DELAY 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, --- S6
(Blind Dial) 16, 32 SEC
PAUSE DELAY 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, --- S8
16, 32 SEC
CALL TIMEOUT 15, 30, 45, --- S7
60, 75, 90,
105, 120 SEC
ANSWER RING 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 --- S0
#X
AUTOCALL- ENABLE, --- S72
BACK DISABLE
CHANGE VOLUME LOW L1, L2 S22
SPEAKER CONTROL HIGH L3
OPERATION?

Modem 3600 4-9


Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)


Item AT S-
Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Option Com. Reg
5 MODIFY CHANGE SPEAKER ON UNTIL M1 S22
CONFIGU- SPEAKER CONTROL CARR
c RATION? OPERATION? DETECT
o (continued) (continued) ALWAYS M2
n ON
t. OFF WHILE M3
DIALING
ALWAYS M4
OFF
LOAD/STORE LOAD NO, 1-9 &Fn ---
OPTION SET? FACTORY (n=1-9)
OPTION
LOAD USER 1 Z0 ---
OPTION SET 2 Z1
STORE PRESENT 1 &W ---
OPTIONS 2 &W1
USER OPTION 1 &Y ---
AT RESET 2 &Y1
6 CHANGE PHONE ENTER &Zx=n ---
PHONE NUMBER NUMBER (n=phone #
NUMBERS? 32 digits and modi-
fiers)
*CNx,n
7 FRONT CHANGE RMT ENTER %P ---
PANEL PASSWORD? PASSWORD
FEATURES? ENTER REMOTE ENTER %T ---
CONFIGURA- REM CFG
TION PASSWORD
EXIT REMOTE EXIT &T ---
CONFIGURA-
TION
CHANGE FRONT ENTER --- ---
PANEL PASS- PASSWORD
WORD *
ACTIVATE --- ---
SECURITY

*Password of 0000 disables front panel security.

4-10 Modem 3600


Front Panel Operation

Front Panel Security


The Front Panel Security feature provides password protection for front
panel menu access. The modem is shipped from the factory with this
feature disabled.
The Front Panel Security password is a 4-digit string that can be set to
any combination of digits from “0000” to “9999”. Selecting a password
of “0000” disables Front Panel Security; any other password enables it.
IMPORTANT: Without your password, you cannot access front panel
configuration. Keep your password in a safe place. If you forget your
Front Panel Security password, contact Technical Support. Refer to
“Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2.
When this feature is enabled, it can be activated in these ways:
• Explicitly, by a front panel screen under Main Menu #7
• By the modem, when no front panel buttons have been pressed for
3 minutes
When Front Panel Security is activated, the front panel menu returns to
Main Menu #1 and the front panel is secured.
In secured state, the Main Menu #1 screen continues to maintain modem
status, but a password must be entered before other front panel screens
may be accessed. Pressing any front panel button causes the modem to
prompt for the front panel password. After the password has been
entered, a message briefly displays the result of the password validation
process and, depending on the result, Front Panel Security either
becomes inactive or returns to its active state.

Modem 3600 4-11


Front Panel Operation

During password entry, the front panel buttons operate as follows:


• Pressing NO makes the character at the cursor change to the next
valid password character.
• Pressing YES while the cursor is on any of the first three
password characters makes the cursor advance to the next
password character. When the cursor is on the last password
character, pressing YES makes the modem accept the displayed
password.
• Pressing TALK/DATA while the cursor is on the first password
character aborts password entry. When the cursor is on any other
character, this button makes the cursor move to the first character.

4-12 Modem 3600


Chapter 5
AT Commands

This chapter describes commands used to select options and operate the
modem. Some options depend on, or are restricted by, the mode of
operation. Appendix E provides a quick reference list.

Command Categories
The modem offers these major categories of command statements:
• Response (page 5-5)
• Dial (page 5-13)
• Answer (page 5-16)
• Terminal Interface (page 5-19)
• General (page 5-22)
• Private Line (page 5-33)
• Configuration (page 5-37)
• Remote Configuration (page 5-41)
Other AT command groups are discussed in these chapters:
• Protocol (Chapter 6)
• Test (Chapter 7)
• Security (Chapter 8)
• Fax (Chapter 9)
• S-registers (Chapter 10)

Operation Modes
In asynchronous operation, the modem functions in one of these modes:
• Offline Command Mode
• Online Command Mode
• Data Mode

Modem 3600 5-1


AT Commands

Offline Command Mode


In offline command mode (generally referred to as command mode), the
modem communicates with the computer or terminal. Commands can
be entered separately or in strings. There is no data communication link
established in this mode.

Online Command Mode


This mode is entered from the data mode after the escape command has
been entered. The escape command is performed by entering the escape
character (+ is the default) three times. The data communication link
remains established but data transmission is suspended. The modem
then accepts commands as it does in offline command mode.

Data Mode
The modem goes to data mode (online) after it acknowledges the proper
signal and successfully connects with a compatible modem. In data
mode, the modem sends and receives data, but does not accept or
execute command instructions.
Example: The modem is in the command state. The D command and
phone number are used to dial a remote modem. The local modem waits
to receive an answer back tone from the remote modem. When the local
modem receives the carrier, it leaves the command state and goes online
in the data mode. At this time, both modems are using the telephone line
and a communication link is established.

Sending Commands to the Modem


When the computer, modem, and monitor are on, an instruction can be
sent to the modem telling it what function or activity to perform. The
instruction, called a command statement, command string, or command,
is typed using the computer/terminal keyboard. The command statement
temporarily resides in a section of memory called the command buffer.
Each command statement is made up of characters, numbers, and
keyboard symbols such as the & and % signs. Commands must be
written in a specific form so the modem recognizes and follows the
instruction.

5-2 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Creating a Command Statement AT


To create a command statement use the following steps:
1) Type AT. This is the Attention Code telling the unit a command
statement follows.
2) Type the command.
3) Press the Enter key to send the command statement to the
modem.
An example of a command statement using the dial command (D)
follows.
ATD554-1212

This statement can be read as “Attention: Dial 554-1212.”


Another AT command statement example is:
ATZ

This statement can be read as “Attention: execute the Z command.”


After entering a command line the modem returns a response message
indicating whether or not the command was accepted or giving the data
requested by the command line.
To clear command statements from the buffer you can:
• Turn the modem off,
• Enter AT, or
• Use the DTR reset feature (“Data Terminal Ready &D” section on
page 5-20).

Autobaud
The attention code (AT) is analyzed by the modem to determine the
transmission speed, parity, and bits per character used by the DTE. This
autobaud process is repeated each time the AT command prefix is sent.

Guidelines for Creating Command Statements


The attention code (AT) may be upper or lower case but not a
combination like aT.
• Press the Enter key to execute a command.
• The command buffer can hold 80 characters.
• Use the backspace or delete key to erase the last character.
Even though the initial AT code must be all upper or lower case,
characters that follow can be any mix of upper and lower case.

Modem 3600 5-3


AT Commands

Monitor Display
As commands are typed they appear on the monitor so the operator can
verify the input. This is called local character echo. The echo may be
turned on or off using AT commands. Refer to the “Local Character
Echo E” section on page 5-22 for details.

Command Statement Buffer


The modem temporarily stores up to 80 characters in the command
buffer. If this limit is exceeded, the modem does not accept the
command and sends an ERROR message. To correct this condition,
retype the command using 80 characters or less.
The AT characters and punctuation used in telephone numbers do not
take up space in the buffer. Blank characters used as spaces to help
increase readability are not counted. For example, the modem reads the
commands:
ATD (212) 554-1212
ATD2125551212
ATD 212 555 1212

as having 11 characters each. Commands can be typed in any of these


forms.

Backspace Key
Use the backspace key to change the command statement or correct
errors. The backspace key allows the cursor to be moved back to the
character(s) in error. The command can then be retyped from that point.
Example: ATD5551211 has been typed. To change the last 1 to 2,
press the backspace key once, type 2, and press Enter to execute the
command.

Repeating a Command A/
This command tells the computer to repeat the last command stored in
its buffer. It automatically reexecutes the command without retyping.
The return key does not need to be pressed.
Example: The ATD5551212 command has been executed, and the
phone is busy. To repeat the instruction type A/. Do not use AT before
this command: AT empties the buffer.

5-4 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Numbered Commands
Commands that start with the same letter are distinguished by a number
following the letter.
For example, the M0 command selects speaker always off, M1 speaker
on until carrier detected, and M2 selects speaker always on.
Note
The zero (0) may be omitted; the commands M and M0 are
identical. This manual uses the nonzero form. The modem
treats both the same, but zeros count against the buffer total.

Group Commands
A group of commands can be typed in a single command statement.
Pressing the Enter key sends the entire command string to the modem,
which executes each command individually in the order it appears in the
command statement reading from left to right.
For example, the command statement ATQ0V0L3DT5551212 means
• AT Attention.
• Q Allow response messages to be sent.
• V Select digit code responses.
• L3 Select high volume.
• DT Tone dial 555-1212.
The modem executes the AT command followed by the Q, V, L, D, and T
commands. ATQ0V0L3DT5551212 can be read as
ATQVL3DT5551212. Eliminating zeros reduces the number of
characters, allowing more room in the buffer.
The dial D command initiates the dial process so no other commands,
only dial modifiers, can follow it.
Note
Bold text indicates command parameter defaults.

Response Commands
The modem communicates with the operator through response
messages. These appear on the monitor or a computer printout to show
the result of the command or action executed. Response messages can
appear as words or numbers.

Modem 3600 5-5


AT Commands

Digit / Word Selection V


The V command tells the modem which type of response message to
show on the monitor. Some software requires digit response messages
but words are easier to remember.
Command Operation
V Enables digit response messages
V1 Enables word response messages

Response Displays Q
The Q command enables or disables response messages. The modem
still responds to commands when the response display is inhibited.
Command Operation
Q Response display on
Q1 Response display off
Q2 Response display on in originate mode only

Negotiation Displays W
The W command enables or disables negotiation response messages.
These messages are verbose negotiation status displays to alert the user
to the link rate, protocol, and DTE rate.
Command Operation
W Disables negotiation displays
W1 Enables negotiation displays
W2 Displays DCE link rate only

Protocol Result Codes \V


Enable or disable protocol result codes. Table 5-1 lists these codes.
Command Operation
\V Disable protocol result codes
\V1 Enable protocol result codes

5-6 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Call Progress / Connect Speed Messages X


The X command selects response code/message displays and dialing
options such as call progress monitoring, busy signal or dial tone
detection and blind dialing.
Command Operation
X Dial tone and busy signal detection not selected;
CONNECT (code 1) response messages displayed
for all speeds
X1 Dial tone and busy signal detection not selected;
appropriate CONNECT response messages or codes
displayed for data rate
X2 Dial tone detection only; NO DIAL TONE message
or code appears if dial tone not detected within 5
seconds
X3 Busy signal detection only; BUSY message or code
appears if dialed number is busy
X4 Dial tone and busy signal detection; appropriate
CONNECT message or code displayed

The X command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off


hook, wait the amount of time set in register S6, and dial the number. If
connection is made, the modem returns a CONNECT (code 1) message
to the screen regardless of the connection rate. With a basic response,
the modem does not detect a busy or no dial tone condition.
The X1 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off
hook, wait the amount of time set in register S6, and dial the number. If
connection is made the modem returns an appropriate CONNECT
message or code to the screen. The modem does not detect a busy or no
dial tone situation.
The X2 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off
hook and wait for a dial tone before dialing. If a dial tone is not detected
within 5 seconds, the modem sends a NO DIALTONE message and
hangs up. The modem does not detect a busy situation in this mode.

Modem 3600 5-7


AT Commands

The X3 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off


hook, wait the amount of time set in register S6 and dial the number. If
a busy signal is detected, the modem sends a BUSY message and hangs
up. If the call is completed, the appropriate CONNECT message similar
to X1 is displayed. The modem does not detect a no dial tone situation.
The X4 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off
hook and wait for a dial tone before dialing. If a dial tone is not detected
within 5 seconds, the modem returns a NO DIALTONE message and
hangs up. If a busy signal is detected, the modem returns a BUSY
message and hangs up. If the call is completed, the appropriate
CONNECT message similar to X1 is displayed.
The X4 command combines the features of X1, X2, and X3. The factory
setting is X4.
Note
When an X2, X3, or X4 command is in effect, an appropriate
CONNECT data rate message or code is displayed as for X1.
When a blind dial command (X, X1, X3) is in effect, the
modem waits 2 seconds or the time set in S6 and then dials.

Number Code Application *RC


Some communications software packages use different number codes to
indicate the data rate of the serial port. This option selects either of two
commonly used number code sets.
Command Code Set Number Operation
*RC Standard 15 4800 bps
18 9600 bps
*RC1 Alternate 11 4800 b p s
12 9600 bps

Note
Asterisks in AT commands are part of the command and do
not indicate footnotes.

5-8 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Response Number Codes / Messages


Response number codes, messages, and their meanings are listed in .
The connect rates are serial port rates (DTE), not DCE rates.
Code Message Meaning
0 OK Command received
1 CONNECT Connect at 300 bps while X1, X2,
X3, or X4 command in effect; all
rates while X command in effect
2 RING Ring detected
3 NO CARRIER Valid carrier not detected within
period specified by register S7, or
carrier lost for value of S10 or
more
4 ERROR Command not recognized or too
long
5 CONNECT 1200 Connection made at 1200 bps
6 NO DIAL TONE No dial tone detected for 5
seconds (X2 or X4 command in
effect)
7 BUSY Dialed number busy (X3 or X4
command in effect)
10 CONNECT 2400 DTE rate 2400 bps
11, 15 CONNECT 4800 DTE rate 4800 bps
12, 18 CONNECT 9600 DTE rate 9600 bps
20 CONNECT 300 DTE rate 300 bps
22 CONNECT 7200 DTE rate 7200 bps
23 CONNECT 12000 DTE rate 12000 bps
24 CONNECT 14400 DTE rate 14400 bps
25 CONNECT 16800 DTE rate 16800 bps
26 CONNECT 19200 DTE rate 19200 bps
27 CONNECT 21600 DTE rate 21600 bps
28 CONNECT 24000 DTE rate 24000 bps
29 CONNECT 26400 DTE rate 26400 bps
30 CONNECT 28800 DTE rate 28800 bps

Modem 3600 5-9


AT Commands

Code Message Meaning


31 CONNECT 31200 DTE rate 31200 bps
32 CONNECT 32000 DTE rate 32000 bps
33 CONNECT 33600 DTE rate 33600 bps
34 CONNECT 38400 DTE rate 38400 bps
35 CONNECT 57600 DTE rate 57600 bps
36 CONNECT 115200 DTE rate 115200 bps
37 CONNECT 230400 DTE rate 230400 bps
38 CONNECT 300/V42bis V.42 bis 300 bps connection
39 CONNECT 600/V42bis V.42 bis 600 bps connection
40 CONNECT 1200/V42bis V.42 bis 1200 bps connection
41 CONNECT 2400/V42bis V.42 bis 2400 bps connection
42 CONNECT 4800/V42bis V.42 bis 4800 bps connection
43 CONNECT 7200/V42bis V.42 bis 7200 bps connection
44 CONNECT 9600/V42bis V.42 bis 9600 bps connection
45 CONNECT 12000/ V.42 bis 12000 bps connection
V42bis
46 CONNECT 14400/ V.42 bis 14400 bps connection
V42bis
47 CONNECT 16800/ V.42 bis 16800 bps connection
V42bis
48 CONNECT 19200/ V.42 bis 19200 bps connection
V42bis
49 CONNECT 21600/ V.42 bis 21600 bps connection
V42bis
50 CONNECT 24000/ V.42 bis 24000 bps connection
V42bis
51 CONNECT 26400/ V.42 bis 26400 bps connection
V42bis
52 CONNECT 28800/ V.42 bis 28800 bps connection
V42bis
53 CONNECT 31200/ V.42 bis 31200 bps connection
V42bis

5-10 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Code Message Meaning


54 CONNECT 32000/ V.42 bis 32000 bps connection
V42bis
55 CONNECT 33600/ V.42 bis 33600 bps connection
V42bis
56 CONNECT 38400/ V.42 bis 38400 bps connection
V42bis
57 CONNECT 57600/ V.42 bis 57600 bps connection
V42bis
58 CONNECT 115200/ V.42 bis 115200 bps connection
V42bis
59 CONNECT 230400/ V.42 bis 230400 bps connection
V42bis
60 CONNECT 300/V42 V.42 300 bps connection
61 CONNECT 600/V42 V.42 600 bps connection
62 CONNECT 1200/V42 V.42 1200 bps connection
63 CONNECT 2400/V42 V.42 2400 bps connection
64 CONNECT 4800/V42 V.42 4800 bps connection
65 CONNECT 7200/V42 V.42 7200 bps connection
66 CONNECT 9600/V42 V.42 9600 bps connection
67 CONNECT 12000/V42 V.42 12000 bps connection
68 CONNECT 14400/V42 V.42 14400 bps connection
69 CONNECT 16800/V42 V.42 16800 bps connection
70 CONNECT 19200/V42 V.42 19200 bps connection
71 CONNECT 21600/V42 V.42 21600 bps connection
72 CONNECT 24000/V42 V.42 24000 bps connection
73 CONNECT 26400/V42 V.42 26400 bps connection
74 CONNECT 28800/V42 V.42 28800 bps connection
75 CONNECT 31200/V42 V.42 31200 bps connection
76 CONNECT 32000/V42 V.42 32000 bps connection
77 CONNECT 33600/V42 V.42 33600 bps connection
78 CONNECT 38400/V42 V.42 38400 bps connection
79 CONNECT 57600/V42 V.42 57600 bps connection

Modem 3600 5-11


AT Commands

Code Message Meaning


80 CONNECT 115200/V42 V.42 115200 bps connection
81 CONNECT 230400/V42 V.42 230400 bps connection
82 CONNECT 300/MNP5 MNP5 300 bps connection
83 CONNECT 600/MNP5 MNP5 600 bps connection
84 CONNECT 1200/MNP5 MNP5 1200 bps connection
85 CONNECT 2400/MNP5 MNP5 2400 bps connection
86 CONNECT 4800/MNP5 MNP5 4800 bps connection
87 CONNECT 7200/MNP5 MNP5 7200 bps connection
88 CONNECT 9600/MNP5 MNP5 9600 bps connection
89 CONNECT 12000/MNP5 MNP5 12000 bps connection
90 CONNECT 14400/MNP5 MNP5 14400 bps connection
91 CONNECT 16800/MNP5 MNP5 16800 bps connection
92 CONNECT 19200/MNP5 MNP5 19200 bps connection
93 CONNECT 21600/MNP5 MNP5 21600 bps connection
94 CONNECT 24000/MNP5 MNP5 24000 bps connection
95 CONNECT 26400/MNP5 MNP5 26400 bps connection
96 CONNECT 28800/MNP5 MNP5 28800 bps connection
97 CONNECT 31200/MNP5 MNP5 31200 bps connection
98 CONNECT 32000/MNP5 MNP5 32000 bps connection
99 CONNECT 33600/MNP5 MNP5 33600 bps connection
100 CONNECT 38400/MNP5 MNP5 38400 bps connection
101 CONNECT 57600/MNP5 MNP5 57600 bps connection
102 CONNECT 115200/ MNP5 115200 bps connection
MNP5
103 CONNECT 230400/ MNP5 230400 bps connection
MNP5
104 CONNECT 300/MNP MNP 300 bps connection
105 CONNECT 600/MNP MNP 600 bps connection
106 CONNECT 1200/MNP MNP 12000 bps connection
107 CONNECT 2400/MNP MNP 24000 bps connection
108 CONNECT 4800/MNP MNP 4800 bps connection
109 CONNECT 7200/MNP MNP 7200 bps connection

5-12 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Code Message Meaning


110 CONNECT 9600/MNP MNP 9600 bps connection
111 CONNECT 12000/MNP MNP 12000 bps connection
112 CONNECT 14400/MNP MNP 14400 bps connection
113 CONNECT 16800/MNP MNP 16800 bps connection
114 CONNECT 19200/MNP MNP 19200 bps connection
115 CONNECT 21600/MNP MNP 21600 bps connection
116 CONNECT 24000/MNP MNP 24000 bps connection
117 CONNECT 26400/MNP MNP 26400 bps connection
118 CONNECT 28800/MNP MNP 28800 bps connection
119 CONNECT 31200/MNP MNP 31200 bps connection
120 CONNECT 32000/MNP MNP 32000 bps connection
121 CONNECT 33600/MNP MNP 33600 bps connection
122 CONNECT 38400/MNP MNP 38400 bps connection
123 CONNECT 57600/MNP MNP 57600 bps connection
124 CONNECT 115200/MNP MNP 115200 bps connection
125 CONNECT 230400/MNP MNP 230400 bps connection

Dial Commands
Dial commands let the modem originate a call to another modem. These
commands can be used with either tone or pulse dial telephone systems.

Dialing D
To dial a number, for example 555-1212, insert the D command in
the dialing sequence.
AT D 555-1212

The modem dials the number, either pulse or tone, whichever is in


effect, and takes the role of the originate modem.
Use spaces, hyphens, parentheses, or other punctuation, except dial
modifiers, to make the command line easier to read and enter. For
example, these are all treated the same:
AT D 1-800-555-1212
AT D 1 (800) 555-1212
ATD18005551212

Modem 3600 5-13


AT Commands

Dial modifiers are as follows.


Command Operation
T Tone dialing
P Pulse dialing
, Insert a long pause (2 sec or value in S8)
W Wait for 2nd dial tone
! Flash (1/2 sec)
R Switch to answer mode after dialing
; Return to command mode after dialing
@ Wait for silence
S Dial stored command line or number

Tone Dialing T
To tone dial a number sequence, insert a T in the dial sequence.
AT D T 323-1111

In this example, the modem tone dials the telephone number. The
dialing method selected remains in effect until changed.

Pulse Dialing P
To pulse dial a number sequence, insert a P in the dial sequence.
AT D P 554-9902

Insert Long Pause ,


To insert a long pause in the dialing sequence, use a comma. This inserts
a 2 second delay (or the value in register S8).
AT D P 9, 1-800-554-1000

Here the modem pulse dials a 9, pauses for the telephone system to
switch to an outside line, then dials the phone number. Comma pauses
may be inserted consecutively if desired.

Wait for Second Dial Tone W


To wait for second dial tone insert a W in the dialing sequence.
AT D 9 W 323-8000

Instead of using a comma pause for an outside line, wait up to 30


seconds (time specified by S7) for a second dial tone.

5-14 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Hook Flash !
To flash the switchboard, insert an exclamation mark in the dialing
sequence.
AT D T 9W 323-8000 ,!, #7 377

This inserts a 0.5 second on hook condition, usually for transferring a


call or similar use.
In this example, the modem tone dials a 9, waits for the second dial
tone, dials the phone number, pauses, flashes to start the transfer, pauses
a second time, then uses #7 to transfer the call to extension 377.

Switching to Answer Mode after Dialing R


To switch to answer mode after dialing, use an R at the end of the dial
sequence.
AT D 554-2345 R

Use this command suffix to call an originate-only modem.

Remaining in Command Mode ;


To remain in command mode after dialing, place a semicolon at the end
of the dial sequence.
AT D 234-5678;

The modem will dial the telephone number entered but will not attempt
to train when the remote service answers the call.
This is used to retain control so that further dialing tones may be entered
with the following:
AT DTn;

where n= additional tones to be sent.

Wait for 5 Seconds of Silence @


To wait for 5 seconds of silence (no answer back tone) after accessing
an electronic service, use the @ command in the dialing sequence.
AT D 399-4700 @ 2251 ;

In this example the modem dials the number and, after the connection,
waits for 5 consecutive seconds of silence. The modem then sends
service code 2251 and returns to command mode for further input.

Modem 3600 5-15


AT Commands

For example, you might enter a dollar amount for a banking transaction
by entering
AT D 1400 ;

This sends the sequence 1400 and then returns to the command mode
for further entries, according to the requirements of the banking service.

Dialing a Stored Telephone Number Sn


To dial one of the previously stored numbers, enter Sn where n
represents a stored telephone number location between 1 and 9.
AT D S9

In this example, the number stored in location 9 is dialed.


Note
DS and DS1 are the same location.

Autodial Number Location *AUn


The *AUn command selects stored number n (n=1 to 9) to be
autodialed. This is the autodial number, which is used for any autodial
application.

Voice Calls
To make a voice call, dial the number with the telephone. To use the dial
command for the call, enter the following dialing sequence:
AT D (number);

The ; modifier recalls the command mode and prevents the modem from
training. The remote site must be answered by the telephone for the
voice call to be successful.

Switching from Voice to Data


After dialing, place the modems at both ends in data mode by pressing
the TALK/DATA button. The *DA1 command can also be used to
change from talk mode to data mode.

Answering A Call
There are three ways to answer a call for a data connection:
• Manually
• AT Command
• Autoanswer

5-16 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Manual Answer
When the phone rings, answer by pressing the TALK/DATA button.

AT Command Answer A
The modem can be made to answer a call by entering ATA when the
phone rings.

Autoanswer S0
Autoanswer is controlled by register S0. S0 determines which ring the
modem answers on. S0 can be loaded with a value between 1 and 255
for autoanswer. Entering ATS0=0 disables autoanswer. Decide which
ring the modem is to answer on and set S0 to that decimal value.When
S0 is one or greater, the modem automatically answers on the selected
ring and connects with the calling modem.
Note
If the modem is set to respond to DTR the DTR signal must
be on for autoanswer to work.

Caller ID *ID
If the telephone company is providing Caller ID services to the local
phone line, the Modem 3600 can report Caller ID to the DTE. *
Note
The communications software package may need
reconfiguring to look for the “Caller Number:” message
prefix so that it knows when to look for a phone number.
Command Operation
*ID Disable Caller ID
*ID1 Enable Caller ID

Modem 3600 5-17


AT Commands

When Caller ID is enabled, one of the messages in Table 5-2 appears on


the computer screen after the first RING message:

Table 5-2. Caller ID Message s


The modem sends this message... If:
CALLER<sp>NUMBER: The number was delivered
(505)555-1313 by the phone company
CALLER<sp>NUMBER:OUT<sp> OF The number was not
<sp>AREA available from the phone
company
CALLER<sp>NUMBER:PRIVATE Delivery was blocked by
the caller
CALL FAILURE<sp>NUMBER: The number was received
ERROR in error

If the telephone company provides Enhanced Caller ID, the caller's


name appears after the caller phone number.

Distinctive Ring *DR


If the telephone company is providing distinctive ring service to the
local phone line, the Modem 3600 can report the type of ring to the
DTE.* The data communications software package must allow
distinctive ring.
*Caller ID and Distinctive Ring are compatible only with USA
standards.

Command Operation
*DR=0 Disable Distinctive Ring
*DR=1 Enable Distinctive Ring

5-18 Modem 3600


AT Commands

When distinctive ring is enabled, one of the messages in Table 5-3


appears on the DTE instead of the regular RING message:

Table 5-3. Distinctive Ring Message s


The modem sends this
message... If the Ring Was a:
RING A Single ring (1 ring burst)
RING B Double ring (2 ring bursts)
RING C Triple ring (3 ring bursts)

Terminal Interface Commands


The EIA-232 interface connects the modem and DTE. Terminal
interface commands control the action of the modem and the terminal in
response to the signals being exchanged on the interface pins. Refer to
Table 2-1.

Data Carrier Detect &C


When using DCD to indicate a valid carrier, use the &C1 command.
Some terminals and other devices require DCD on in order to
communicate with the modem; if so, use the &C command.
Command Operation
&C DCD always on
&C1 DCD on when modem recognizes remote modem
carrier or, if enabled, when protocol negotiation is
complete.
&C2 DCD on except for 5 seconds after disconnect
&C3 DCD follows RTS on remote modem (simulated
switched carrier V.13).

Note
AT&C3 is used to simulate switched carrier operation.

Note
For simulated switched carrier operation &C3 must be
selected on both modems. Not available in the B103 and V.21
modulation modes.

Modem 3600 5-19


AT Commands

Data Set Ready &S


These commands control the DSR signal generated by the modem to
indicate that the modem is ready for operation. DSR must be on for
some terminals and devices to communicate with the modem.
Command Operation
&S DSR always on
&S1 DSR on when off hook in data mode
&S2 DSR off for 5 seconds after disconnect then returns
to on
&S3 DSR follows off hook (OH) signal

Data Terminal Ready &D


In data mode DTR may be used for modem control.
Command Operation
&D The modem ignores DTR.
&D1 The modem goes to command mode from data
mode when DTR goes from on to off.
&D2 Disconnects when DTR goes from on to off;
disables autoanswer while DTR is off.
&D3 Disconnects, recalls command mode, and resets the
modem to a stored configuration when DTR goes
from on to off.
In dial line mode the modem disconnects; in leased
line, the modem retrains.

Note
If DTR controls dialer is selected, selecting DTR active will
cause an autodial after an off-to-on transition of DTR.

5-20 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Serial Port Ring Indicator (Pin 22) \R


The \R commands determine how the ring indicate signal operates on
pin 22 of the EIA-232 DTE connector.
Command Operation
\R Causes ring indicate signal on pin 22 to turn on
(high) during each ring and remain on during the
call
\R1 Causes ring indicate signal on pin 22 to turn on
(high) during each ring and turn off (low) when the
call is answered

Request to Send / Clear to Send &R


When the modem is operating in nonbuffered mode (direct mode) or in
synchronous mode, &R enables the RTS-to-CTS delay determined by
the value in S26. &R1 forces CTS high and the modem ignores RTS
(default). With &R2 selected, CTS goes high when carrier is detected.
&R9 forces CTS to follow the state of RTS without delay.
Command Operation
&R Enables RTS-to-CTS delay
&R1 CTS forced on
&R2 CTS follows DCD
&R9 CTS equals RTS

Note
RTS/CTS delay is not valid in buffered mode or with error
control enabled.

Note
With &R2 selected, XON/XOFF is the only valid method of
flow control and &C and &C1 are the only valid carrier detect
options.

Modem 3600 5-21


AT Commands

DTE Controlled Fallback Rate (Pin 23) *FB


Pin 23 of the EIA-232 DTE connector provides signal input to the
modem for DTE fallback. If the modem is not using DTE fallback, set
this option to ignore pin 23. To cause the modem to act on high/low
levels of pin 23, enable this option. Negative level forces a higher rate
for primary data rate; positive forces a lower rate providing a fallback
rate.
Command Operation
*FB Ignore pin 23
*FB1 Transition on pin 23 changes speed

General Commands
This series of commands controls various standard options that in most
cases apply to any mode of operation.

Changing from Data Mode to Command Mode +++


To exit data mode and go to online command mode, press the escape
character three times (+ is the default). Pause for the length of time set
by register S12 (1 second is the default) before and after the +++ to
ensure the modem recognizes the escape command.
This sequence temporarily suspends data mode transmissions and
allows command mode operations without breaking or otherwise
disturbing the telephone line connection. The modem responds with OK
when it detects the escape code. Return to data mode by entering the O
command.
Note
The AT command set must be enabled.

Local Character Echo E


Type AT without a carriage return. If the screen shows AT character,
echo is correct. Proceed with other commands as desired.
If the screen shows AATT, enter the E command to correct the double
characters or disable character echo by the modem.

5-22 Modem 3600


AT Commands

If the screen shows no characters, enter the E1 command to turn modem


echo on or enable local echo on the terminal.
Command Operation
E Echo off
E1 Echo on

Online Character Echo F


In some lower speed modems the F command determines if characters
are echoed to the DTE from the modem when online. This function is
generally controlled by the communications software. The modem does
not support online character echo.

Hanging Up H, H1
To end a call, enter the H command. This tells the modem to disconnect
and go on hook. The modem must be in command mode to use this
command.
Enter the H1 command to take the modem off hook. The modem
automatically goes off hook when a dial command is keyed in.

Fast Disconnect H2, H3


The results of the H command can be modified by the H2 and H3
commands. H2 or H3 will not cause a hang up but will affect the method
of hanging up the next time the H command is issued. If H2 is entered,
the H command will hang up according to CCITTV.32 standards. If
operating in V.32 bis mode the H2 command could take several seconds.
If H3 (the fast command) is entered, the H command will hang up much
more rapidly at those speeds.
Command Operation
H The modem hangs up.
H1 Forces modem off hook
H2 Sets H command to normal hangup procedure (long
space, cleardown, protocol)
H3 Sets H command to fast hang up

Modem 3600 5-23


AT Commands

EPROM Check I
PC software packages may issue the I command to verify the modem
will support all commands needed by the software package. The modem
returns ASCII characters representing the model and revision level. To
request the checksum to be calculated on the EPROM, enter the I1
command. The modem returns four ASCII characters representing the
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) in hexadecimal form. Enter the I3
command to request the product version.
Command Operation
I Request product code
I1 Request EPROM checksum value
I3 Request product version
I4 Returns Motorola V.3600
I5 Last disconnect reason

Speaker Volume L
The L commands offer three volume levels.
Command Operation
L, L1, L2 Speaker volume low
L3 Speaker volume high

Speaker Control M
The M commands enable or disable the speaker for monitoring purposes.
Command Operation
M Disables the speaker
M1 Disables the speaker while receiving a carrier signal
M2 Speaker always on
M3 Disables the speaker while dialing and after a
carrier is detected

5-24 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Return Online O
Use the O command when you are operating in the online command
mode and need to return to data mode. It returns the modem to the same
mode (originate or answer) that it was in before escaping to the (online)
command mode. Enter the O1 command to cause a retrain to occur
before going back to data mode.

Long Space Disconnect Y


One method of disconnecting two modems is called long space
disconnect. When any disconnect condition is detected by the local
modem, it will send 4 seconds of data space condition to the remote
modem before disconnecting. This signals the remote modem to
disconnect. The local modem will disconnect if it receives 1.6 or more
seconds of data space condition from a remote modem. If break
sequences of 1.6 or more seconds are to be sent, enter the Y command to
disable this feature and prevent unintentional disconnects.
Note
This option must be disabled if SDLC NRZI data is used.
Command Operation
Y Long space disconnect off
Y1 Long space disconnect on

V.22 bis Guard Tones &G


Guard tones are not used in the United States. If required where
operating the unit, select the appropriate guard tone.
Command Operation
&G No guard tone
&G1 550 Hz guard tone
&G2 1800 Hz guard tone

Asynchronous / Synchronous Mode Selection &M


The &M commands select synchronous or asynchronous operation and
synchronous dial method.

Modem 3600 5-25


AT Commands

Use register S30 to select NRZ/NRZI for data format if using SDLC.
Command Operation
&M Async data/dialer mode (V.25 bis disabled)
&M1 Sync data mode / async dialer
&M2 Sync data mode / DTR dials if active
&M3 Sync data mode / manual dial
&M4 Sync data mode (ASCII) with V.25 bis BISYNC dialer
&M5 Sync data mode (NRZ) with V.25 bis SDLC dialer
&M6 Sync data mode with V.25 bis async dialer
&M7 Async data mode with V.25 bis async dialer
&M8 Sync data mode (EBCDIC) with V.25 bis BISYNC dialer
&M9 Sync data mode (EBCDIC, NRZ) with V.25 bis async
dialer
&M10 Sync data mode (ASCII, NRZI) with V.25 bis SDLC
dialer
&M11 Sync data mode (EBCDIC, NRZI) with V.25 bis SDLC
dialer

IMPORTANT: Synchronous DTE must be available to communicate


with the modem if the V.25 bis dialer is enabled.

Make / Break Dial Pulse Ratio &P


Use the &P command for the dial pulse to be on for 39% and off for
61% of one cycle. Use the &P1 command for the dial pulse to be on for
33% and off for 67% of one cycle.
Command Operation
&P 39% : 61% US and Canada
&P1 33% : 67%

5-26 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Synchronous Transmit Clock Source &X


The &X commands select internal, external, or receive clock as the
transmit clock source.
Command Operation
&X Internal clock
&X1 External clock
&X2 Receive clock

V.34 Rate Selection Thresholds *TH


The *TH commands sets theV.34 rate selection thresholds. TheV.34
modulation dynamically selects the optimum bit rate to run, based on
line quality.
Command Operation
*TH Low V.34 threshold (10 - 6 BER)
*TH1 Medium V.34 threshold (10- 4 BER)
*TH2 High V.34 threshold (10- 2 BER)

V.34 Asymmetric Bit Rates *AS


The *AS command enables or disables the V.34 asymmetric bit rate
capability. This feature allows the modem to run different bit rates on
the receiver and transmitter.
Command Operation
*AS Disable V.34 asymmetric bit rates
*AS1 Enable V.34 asymmetric bit rates

Modulation *MM
The *MM command sets the current modulation type to use when
attempting to make a connection. Using this command automatically
selects the maximum DCE speed (%B) for the selected modulation.
Command Operation
*MM Automode (typically used on dial line)
*MM1 V.21
*MM2 B103
*MM3 Reserved
*MM4 B212A

Modem 3600 5-27


AT Commands

Command Operation
*MM5 V.22 bis
*MM6 V.27 bis 4-wire leased only
*MM7 Reserved
*MM8 V.29 4-wire leased only
*MM9 Reserved
*MM10 V.33 4-wire leased only
*MM11 V.32 bis
*MM12 V.34

Maximum DCE Speed %B


The %B commands set the originating DCE speed to follow the DTE
speed. When originating a call the two modems will not connect at a
speed faster than the lower DCE speed setting of the two modems. To
allow the modem to transmit data at a speed different from DTE speed,
enter the %Bn command where n=1 to 18.
Command Operation
%B Use DTE speed
%B1 300 bps
%B2 1200 bps
%B3 2400 bps
%B4 4800 bps
%B5 9600 uncoded bps *
%B6 9600 bps
%B7 7200 bps
%B8 12000 bps
%B9 14400 bps
%B10 600 bps
%B11 16800 bps
%B12 19200 bps
%B13 21600 bps
%B14 24000 bps
%B15 26400 bps

5-28 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Command Operation
%B16 28800 bps
%B17 31200 bps
%B18 33600 bps

*Valid for V.32 bis modulation only

Note
Use the %B command after the *MM command when specific
modulations are required.

Minimum DCE Speed %L


If the modem connects at a rate lower than the minimum DCE speed, it
disconnects the link automatically.
Command Operation
%L Disabled
%L1 Disabled
%L2 1200 bps
%L3 2400 bps
%L4 4800 bps
%L5 9600 uncoded bps *
%L6 9600 bps
%L7 7200 bps
%L8 12000bps
%L9 14400 bps
%L10 600 bps
%L11 16800 bps
%L12 19200 bps
%L13 21600 bps
%L14 24000 bps
%L15 26400 bps
%L16 28800 bps
%L17 31200 bps
%L18 33600 bps

*Valid for V.32 bis modulation only

Modem 3600 5-29


AT Commands

Auto Retrain %E
This option allows the modem to automatically retrain in response to
poor received signal quality without reconnecting. The modem always
responds to a retrain request from the remote modem.
Command Operation
%E Disable auto retrain
%E1 Enable auto retrain

Automatic Rate Adaption %R


Automatic rate adaption (ARA) allows the modem to automatically
decrease the DCE rate when the allowable bit error rate is exceeded. If
the line condition improves the modem automatically increases the rate.
Select this feature by front panel operation orAT command. Options
include: disabled (factory default), low (BER= 1 in 105 ), medium
(BER= 1 in 10 4), high (BER= 1 in 103).
The following guidelines apply to automatic rate adaption:
• Automatic rate adaption is disabled during direct mode.
• Manual rate adaption is disabled from the front panel when
automatic rate adaption is enabled.
• Only one increment or decrement in the DTE rate is allowed at a
time during rate adaption from the initiating modem.
• When online, initiator rate adaption occurs a maximum of every
12 to 14 seconds from the last occurrence of a rate adaption.
• After the modem drops data rate because of poor signal quality,
the line must improve by approximately 2.5 dB before an increase
in rate can occur.

5-30 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Command Operation
%R Disable automatic rate adaption
%R1 Enable automatic rate adaption using low BER: 1 in 105
%R2 Enable automatic rate adaption using medium BER: 1 in
104
%R3 Enable automatic rate adaption using high BER: 1 in 103

Manual Rate Adaption *RR


The *RR command forces the modem to re-adapt the DCE rate of the
remote modem.
Command Operation
*RR Rate adaption to 2400
*RR1 Rate adaption to 4800
*RR2 Rate adaption to 7200
*RR3 Rate adaption to 9600
*RR4 Rate adaption to 12000
*RR5 Rate adaption to 14400
*RR6 Rate adaption to 16800
*RR7 Rate adaption to 19200
*RR8 Rate adaption to 21600
*RR9 Rate adaption to 24000
*RR10 Rate adaption to 26400
*RR11 Rate adaption to 28800
*RR12 Rate adaption to 31200
*RR13 Rate adaption to 33600

Product Revision Level %V


The %V command displays the product revision level.

Modem 3600 5-31


AT Commands

Online Quick Reference $H


The $H command displays anAT command set quick reference. The
Enter key terminates the page displays and any other key scrolls
through the pages.
Command Operation
$H Displays online quick reference
$H=<string> Search online quick reference for string.

Product Serial Number $V


The $V command displays the product serial number.

Talk / Data *DA


The *DA commands select talk or data mode.
Command Operation
*DA Switches modem to talk
*DA1 Switches modem to data

V.32 Fast Train *FT


The V.32 fast train option is used to reduce training time when operating
over high quality, limited distance dial, or 2-wire leased lines.
Command Operation
*FT Disable fast train
*FT1 Enable fast train

Incoming Call *IC


The *IC command makes the modem disregard an incoming call.

Line Current Disconnect *LC


Dial line operation only. The modem can be configured to disconnect
upon loss or interruption of telephone line current.
Command Operation
*LC Line current disconnect off
*LC1 Line current disconnect short (8 ms)
*LC2 Line current disconnect long (90 ms)

5-32 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Disable AT Command Set *NT


The *NT command disables theAT command set.
The *NT1 command allows the user at a remote modem to enable AT
command operation of another modem via remote configuration.
Command Operation
*NT Disable AT command set
*NT1 Enable AT command set at remote site

If the AT command set of a local modem is accidentally disabled and


must be recovered locally, reset the options through the front panel
LCD, Main Menu #5, submenu CHANGE DTE OPTIONS?, “AT COM-
MAND SET” section on page 4-8.

Dial Line Transmit Level *TDn


Command Operation
*TDn Sets dial line TX level to n where n is a number 9
through 30 corresponding to a TX level of -9 to -30
dBm

Private Line Operation


Note
For a 2- or 4-wire leased line connection to succeed, one
modem must be configured as forced answer and the other
modem as normal originate. Both modems should have only
one protocol, MNP or LAPM, enabled and Protocol Fallback
must be disabled. DCE line speed must be the same for both
modems.

4-Wire Operation
In 4-wire operation, the modem is a full-duplex, leased-line modem
requiring a dedicated 4-wire leased line. Only point-to-point dedicated
leased lines are supported. The 4-wire leased line connects to the
TELSET/LEASED LINE jack on the modem rear panel. Dialing is not
necessary. When connected via leased line the modems will train and
begin communicating with each other. The DIAL jack can be used to
connect a 2-wire dial-up line for dial backup.

Modem 3600 5-33


AT Commands

Note
For operation with modems that use V.33 as the modulation
type, the Modem 3600 must be set up to V.33.

2-Wire Operation
In 2-wire operation, the modem is a full-duplex modem able to operate
over 2-wire leased or PSTN lines.
2-Wire Leased Line Operation
The 2-wire leased line is connected to the TELSET/LEASED LINE
jack; the DIAL jack connects to a 2-wire dial-up line for dial backup.
The leased line connects the local and remote modems directly and
dialing is not necessary. One of the modems must be configured for
forced answer and the other for normal originate. When connected via
leased line the modems will connect and begin communicating with
each other.
The &L command is used to select private line (leased line) operating
mode. The *OR commands select the origination or answer mode when
operating in the leased line configuration.
Note
DTR must be held high in 2-wire or 4-wire leased line
operation. This is accomplished by DTE control, wiring pin
20 of the digital interface cable high, or by selecting the
option IGNORES DTR. If DTR is terminal controlled, loss of
synchronization can be corrected by cycling DTR. This
makes the modem initiate the 2-wire training sequence. DSR
goes off during the training procedure.
2-Wire Dial-up Operation:
Connection to the telephone network is through the DIAL jack. A
standard telephone can be connected to the TELSET/LEASED
LINE jack for manual dialing.

5-34 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Dial Backup
Dial backup allows the modem to switch to a dial backup mode if the
data connection on the leased line is unacceptable for communications.
This can be accomplished in two ways:
• Automatic - backup due to extended loss of carrier or 4
unsuccessful retrains in 3 minutes
• Manual - user determined using front panel controls orAT
commands
In leased line operation, if both units have autodial backup enabled, one
must be configured for forced answer. This prevents both units from
dialing if the leased line fails.
IMPORTANT: Both methods will cause the modem to dial the
prestored autodial number. The originate modem will wait for five
seconds and then initiate the call. The answer modem will wait for a
ring. The modems then train and begin communicating over the dial-up
line. If the dial connection is unsuccessful after three attempts, a retrain
on the leased line will be initiated.
In manual mode, the return to leased line is only done when
commanded. In automatic mode the return to leased line is initiated after
the lookback time in register S28 has elapsed. To prevent unnecessary
termination of the dial line connection, a leased line lookback test is
performed. If the leased line is not acceptable, the dial connection is
resumed with a retrain. If the leased line is acceptable, the dial
connection is dropped and normal leased line mode is resumed.
When the unit attempts to return to leased line, the LCD displays
LEASE LOOKBACK. If the leased line has been restored to service,
data can be passed approximately 10 seconds after LEASE
LOOKBACK was initiated. The LCD will continue to display LEASE
LOOKBACK for slightly more than a minute. During this time the dial
line connection is maintained if a return to dial line operation is
required. When the LCD displays ON LINE again the dial line is
disconnected.
Note
A diagnostic test initiated during dial backup mode
terminates when the modem performs a leased line lookback.

Modem 3600 5-35


AT Commands

Dial / Leased Line &L


&L selects line operation as required:
Command Operation
&L Dial (switched)
&L1 Leased (private) 2-wire
&L2 Leased (private) 4-wire

Dial Backup *DB


Command Operation
*DB Manual dial backup operation
*DB1 Automatic dial backup operation

Return to Leased Line from Dial Backup *LB


During dial backup operation, *LB makes the modem return to leased
line operation.
During leased line operation with forced answer enabled, *LB makes
the modem wait for a dial backup call.

Manual Dial Backup *LD


*LD dials the autodial number if the modem is in originate mode with
manual dial backup selected. Available in leased line operation only.

Answer / Originate *OR


*OR forces the modem to answer or originate mode. This option is used
during 2- and 4-wire leased line operation with error correction and/or
dial backup.
Command Operation
*OR Force originate
*OR1 Force answer

Leased Line Transmit Level *TLn

Command Operation
*TLn Sets leased line TX level to n where n is a number 0
through 30 corresponding to a TX level of 0 to -30
dBm

5-36 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Configuration Commands
These commands recall various profiles for insertion into the active
profile, store the active profile and telephone numbers in nonvolatile
memory, and designate the powerup profile. Remote configuration is
discussed on page 5-41.

Configuration Profiles
Modem operations are controlled by option settings selected from
factory defaults stored in ROM, active settings stored in RAM, and
custom settings stored in nonvolatile memory. These three code storage
locations are called profiles.

Active Profile
The active profile holds the current option settings and is used by the
modem for all operations and functions. Any active profile option can
be changed to meet an immediate requirement. The active profile is
maintained in volatile memory referred to as S-registers.

Stored Profile
When an active configuration is established that meets all operating
requirements, it can be transferred to one of the stored profiles. Two
stored profiles are available for greater versatility.
If the active profile has been temporarily changed it can be reset to
either of the stored profiles with the Z command. The &Y command
selects one of the two stored profiles to be the powerup profile.

Factory Profile
The factory configurations are stored in ROM and cannot be changed by
the user; they can be transferred to the active profile and then modified
to fit a specific application if needed. The &F command recalls one of
the nine factory configurations.

Modem 3600 5-37


AT Commands

Storing a Configuration &W


The &W commands store the current configuration options in one of two
nonvolatile memory locations (Figure 5-1). The stored configurations
are retained in memory even when power is off, or until &W is issued
with a new configuration.
Command Operation
&W Store options to user option set 1
&W1 Store options to user option set 2

Figure 5-1. Configuration Storage and Recall

Powerup Option Set &Y


The &Y command determines which user option set is loaded during
powerup and reset.
Command Operation
&Y Powerup with user option set 1
&Y1 Powerup with user option set 2
&Y? Displays currently selected powerup option set

5-38 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Load Factory Options &Fn


The &Fn command loads one of the existing configuration sets,
providing a complete configuration for a compatible system/network
environment. Refer to the Appendix H for a complete list of the options
in each set.
Command Operation
&F, &F1 Load factory option set 1 (async dial-up withV.42 bis)
&F2 Load factory option set 2 (async dial-up withoutV.42
bis)
&F3 Load factory option set 3 (sync dial-up without V.42 bis)
&F4 Load factory option set 4 (sync 4-wire leased line
without V.42 bis)
&F5 Load factory option set 5 (async 4-wire leased line with
V.42 bis)
&F6 Load factory option set 6 (async 4-wire leased line
without V.42 bis)
&F7 Load factory option set 7 (sync 2-wire leased line
normal originate)
&F8 Load factory option set 8 (sync 2-wire leased line forced
answer)
&F9 Load factory option set 9 (syncV.25 bis dialer)

Reset to Stored Configuration Z


The Z commands reset the modem and immediately load either user
option set 1 or 2 as the current configuration. This command saves time
once a proven configuration is established.
Command Operation
Z Resets the modem and immediately loads user option
set 1
Z1 Resets the modem and immediately loads user option
set 2

Modem 3600 5-39


AT Commands

View Configuration Profiles/Received Signal Options


&V
This command lets the user view the current configuration profile in the
form of S-register values. &V1 displays the received signal options.
Command Operation
&V Displays configuration profiles
&V1 Displays received signal options
&V2 Displays active profile

Storing a Telephone Command Line &Zx=n, *CNx,n,


*ND
Nine stored phone number locations of up to 31 characters each are
available in nonvolatile memory. Normally, one phone number per
location is accommodated. However, a phone number longer than 31
characters can overflow into the next location. Any spaces remaining in
the overflowed location cannot be used for another number. The stored
phone number is retained until replaced by another number. Modem
power can be turned off without affecting stored information.
To store a telephone command line in a location, enter the &Zx=n
command where x = the location and n = the number:
AT &Z 8 = 554-1212

In this example the command sequence to dial the indicated number is


stored at location 8 for later dialing.
Note
Neither the AT prefix nor the D command should follow the
&Zx=n.
• &Zx=n - Stores telephone number n, including dial modifiers, at
location x (0-9, up to 31 digits).
• *CNx,n - Stores telephone number n, including dial modifiers, at
location x (0-9, up to 31 digits).
• *CNx,- Clears telephone number location x
• *ND - Displays the stored numbers (1-9).

5-40 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Retaining / Restoring Options *RO


This option is used when the modem is shared by two or more DTEs.
When options are retained, the current configuration is not altered at
disconnect. With options restored, the modem returns to the previously
stored configuration on disconnect.
When options are restored at disconnect, the following commands
return OK but are not executed:
• *CNStore telephone number
• &ZStore telephone number
• &FRecall factory configuration
• &WStore current configuration

Command Operation
*RO Retain options at disconnect
*RO1 Restore options at disconnect

Soft Download Password %P1, $Y


Select a numeric password to permit/inhibit software downloading via
flash memory if desired. The process is detailed in Appendix H.
Command Operation
%P1=pw Set software download password to 0-99999999
%P1=D Disable software download
%P1? Display software download password
$Y Enable soft download flash

Remote Configuration
This mode of operation allows viewing or modifying the options of a
remote modem that supports remote configuration. Remote
configuration is performed using the front panel LCD or, more
commonly, AT commands from the local terminal. Remote
configuration is initiated by the local (master) modem through a
proprietary protocol, a security code, and an acknowledgment from the
remote (slave) unit to be modified. The security code is inserted and
provides protection from unauthorized entry. The modems are shipped
from the factory without a security code.

Modem 3600 5-41


AT Commands

Note
Remote configuration is supported at all rates except 300 bps.

Remote Configuration Security


The correct security code must be received by the remote modem before
remote configuration can be established. Once established, the local
DTE becomes a virtual terminal and can serve both local and remote
modems. After starting remote configuration, the local DTE serves the
remote modem.
To return DTE service to the local modem while in remote
configuration, issue the +++ escape sequence.
Return DTE service again to the remote modem by issuing the O
command. Switching DTE service between local and remote modems
may be performed as needed.
To exit remote configuration, return DTE service to the local modem.
The &T command will exit remote configuration mode.
Remote configuration may be entered immediately after dialing by
placing the remote configuration command (%T=), without the = sign
and followed by the security code, at the end of the dial string.

Remote Security Code %P=


A security code prevents unauthorized access to remote configuration
mode. This code is separate from low and high security passwords,
which are discussed in Chapter 8. The security code is user
programmable and can be set to any value from a single 0 to any
combination up to 99999999 using the %P=(desired code)
command.
Example: If the remote modem security code is 12345, the local
modem must include this code in the initialization string before the
remote modem responds.

5-42 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Command Operation
%P= Sets security code to a value 0 to 99999999
entered after the equal sign
%P? Requests local security code to be displayed
%P=D Access for remote configuration is not possible
when security code is disabled
%P=(blank) Clears security code
The %P=D command disables remote configuration. To enable remote
configuration, insert another security code.
IMPORTANT: Do not forget your remote security code. Keep your
code in a safe place. If you do forget your code, contact Technical
Support. Refer to the “Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2.

Entering Remote Configuration %T=, &T


This mode of operation allows you to view or modify the option set of a
compatible remote modem. Enter the %T= (security code of
remote) command to initiate remote configuration.
The modem is shipped from the factory with security code (blank).
This allows remote configuration by using (blank) as the security
code.
Command Operation
%T= This command followed by the correct security
code establishes remote configuration
&T Exits remote configuration

Remote Configuration can also be specified by the dial command by


placing %T (password) after the dial digits (the equal sign is left
off). For example,
ATD 555-1212%T01234

Enabling/Disabling Remote Configuration *RA


The *RA commands enable and disable remote configuration.
Command Operation
*RA Disable remote configuration
*RA1 Enable remote configuration

Modem 3600 5-43


AT Commands

Remote Configuration DTE Speed *RB


This option forces DTE speed to a particular setting, if desired.
Command Operation
*RB Remote configuration DTE speed = 300 bps
*RB1 Remote configuration DTE speed = 600 bps
*RB2 Remote configuration DTE speed = 1200 bps
*RB3 Remote configuration DTE speed = 2400 bps
*RB4 Remote configuration DTE speed = 4800 bps
*RB5 Remote configuration DTE speed = 7200 bps
*RB6 Remote configuration DTE speed = 9600 bps
*RB7 Remote configuration DTE speed = 12000 bps
*RB8 Remote configuration DTE speed = 14400 bps
*RB9 Remote configuration DTE speed = 16800 bps
*RB10 Remote configuration DTE speed = 19200 bps
*RB11 Remote configuration DTE speed = 21600 bps
*RB12 Remote configuration DTE speed = 24000 bps
*RB13 Remote configuration DTE speed = 26400 bps
*RB14 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28800 bps
*RB15 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28400 bps
*RB16 Remote configuration DTE speed = 57600 bps
*RB17 Remote configuration DTE speed = 115200 bps

Remote Configuration Format *RF


Set word length, parity, and stops for remote configuration.
Command Operation
*RF 7 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit
*RF1 7 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
*RF2 7 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
*RF3 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
*RF4 8 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit
*RF5 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
*RF6 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
*RF7 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

5-44 Modem 3600


AT Commands

Remote Configuration Saving or Discarding Options


*RQ
This option allows the opportunity to discard an undesirable option.
Command Operation
*RQ Save remote configuration option selection and exit
*RQ1 Discard remote configuration option selection and
exit

Modem 3600 5-45


Chapter 6
Protocols

CCITT V.42 bis Error Control Protocol


V.42 bis is an industry standard for error control adopted by the
Consultative Committee for International Telephone and Telegraph
(CCITT). The CCITT V.42 bis protocol incorporates two error control
algorithms, LAPM and MNP. LAPM is a CCITT Link Access Protocol
family member related to LAPB and LAPD, currently in use in other
communications applications. MNP is Microcom Networking Protocol,
which has become an industry standard by the large number of its users.
The use of V.42 bis requires both local and remote modems to beV.42 bis
compatible. Error control protocol is transparent to the user and requires
no special hardware or software. Data to be transmitted is put in a buffer
so the modem can retransmit it if an error occurs. The modem also buffers
data received from the remote modem in case an error occurs and the data
is retransmitted. To avoid overfilling the buffer, flow control is used to
control data between the modem and the terminal. V.42 bis protocol
options can be set by AT commands.
Note
Error control protocols are only valid when using asynchronous
DTE options.

Reliable Mode
When an LAPM or MNP link is established, the modem is in reliable
mode. V.42 bis allows negotiation with a remote modem to the highest
level of protocol common to both units. Both LAPM and MNP control
data errors by retransmitting any block of data that was corrupted in
transit. LAPM is assigned highest priority, and, if not supported, then an
MNP connection is attempted.

Modem 3600 6-1


Protocols

Auto-Reliable Mode
In auto-reliable mode the modem negotiates to the highest protocol
(LAPM or MNP) common to both modems. However, if a reliable
connection cannot be established, auto-reliable allows the protocol to
fallback to normal mode.

Constant Speed Interface


The modem serial port adapts to the data rate of the DTE and does not
change speed if the DCE-to-DCE data link connects at another speed.
Therefore, the DTE-to-DCE interface speed is constant.

Data Compression
Using MNP Class 5 data compression, the modem can achieve data
throughput approaching 33600 bps. With LAPM data compression, the
modem can achieve data throughput approaching 115200 bps. This
increase in speed is achieved by automatically analyzing the data stream
and reducing the number of bits required to represent the characters.
100% error-free transmission is assured by the application of the MNP
or LAPM error control protocol on the compressed data.
Compression takes place only if the modem detects that the remote
modem supports compression. If not, a reliable connection is made
without compression.
Although data compression is compatible with any type of data, it is
most efficient for ASCII text files. For maximum throughput when
using data compression, the terminal should be set to a higher speed
than the connect speed with the constant speed interface on and flow
control enabled. When transmitting or receiving data files in one
direction, the throughput can be increased forV.42 bis by having extra
buffer and more processor time with the %C2 and %C3 data compression
commands.

Normal Mode
No error control, with or without constant speed DTE interface. Data is
buffered.

6-2 Modem 3600


Protocols

Direct Mode
The DTE speed and DCE speed are forced to be the same. No error
control or buffering.
Note
In direct mode, with the DCE link established at a rate other
than the original DTE speed, the modem issues the connect
message for the new DTE speed at the original rate. All
subsequent data will be sent to the DTE at the new DCE
speed.

Flow Control
If the serial port speed exceeds that of the modem connection,
characters may be sent by the DTE to the modem faster than it can send
them to the remote modem. The modem holds characters in an internal
buffer until they can be transmitted. When this buffer is full, the modem
uses flow control to cause the DTE to stop sending characters. As the
modem continues to transmit data and the buffer empties, flow control is
again used to cause the DTE to resume sending data. The modem can
use hardware flow control (RTS/CTS) or in-band flow control (XON/
XOFF).

Protocol Commands
These commands enable or control the various data compression, flow
control, and error correction options of the modem. Tabl e6-1 lists the
features associated with each mode.
Note
Bold text indicates command parameter defaults.

Modem 3600 6-3


Protocols

Table 6-1. Operating Modes and Features


Con-
stant
Data Speed
Operating Error Compres Flow Inter-
Mode Correction -sion Control Data face
Normal Disabled Not Allowed Buff- On or off
applicable ered
Direct Disabled Not Not Not DTE=DC
applicable applica- buff- E
ble ered (slaved)
Reliable Enabled On or off Allowed Buff- On
(MNP and ered
LAPM)
Auto- Enabled On or off Allowed Buff- On
reliable ered
(MNP and
LAPM)

Disconnect Buffer Delay %D


Select a delay during which the modem processes data in its transmit
and receive buffers before disconnecting. When a condition exists
which causes a disconnect, the modem tries for n seconds to empty its
buffers. When the buffers are empty or if n=0, the modem disconnects
immediately.
Command Operation
%D Disconnect buffer delay disabled
%Dn Disconnect buffer delay value (n = 1-255 seconds)

6-4 Modem 3600


Protocols

Serial Port (DTE) Constant Speed \J


The \J command allows DCE and DTE to operate at different speeds.
The \J1 command forces serial port (DTE) speed to follow data link
speed in any mode.
If the modem is in direct mode (\J1) and a DCE link is established at a
speed other than that of the original DTE autobaud speed, the modem
will issue the CONNECT message for the new DTE speed at the
original rate. All subsequent data will be sent to the DTE at the new
DCE speed.
Command Operation
\J Disable slaved DTE/DCE (constant speed DTE on)
\J1 Enable slaved DTE/DCE (constant speed DTE off)
\J2 Enable 230.4 kbps as DTE speed
\J3 Disable 230.4 kbps as DTE speed

Note
The 230.4 kbps DTE speed is available, but the DTE will not
autobaud to 230.4 kbps. With the modem set for 115.2 kbps,
enter AT\J2 to enable the speed, and reset the DTE for 230.4
kbps. When the modem is set for 230.4 kbps, enter AT\J3 to
disable it if needed. Reset the DTE for 115.2 kbps.

V.42 Optional Detection Phase \M


This is a data sequence that speeds up the LAPM link negotiation time if
V.42 LAPM is supported by the remote modem.
Command Operation
\M V.42 fast detect data sequence disabled
\M1 V.42 fast detect data sequence enabled

Modem 3600 6-5


Protocols

Operating Mode \N
Select theV.42 bis mode to be used in data mode. An \Nn command
issued during command mode while a connection is in progress will not
affect the current connection but will be acted on for subsequent
connections. LAPM or MNP protocol operation is referred to as
MNP-only mode, and the auto-reliable modes allow protocol fallback.

Command Operation
\N Normal mode — no error control; data buffered
\N1 Direct mode — no error control; data not buffered
\N2 MNP only — try MNP; disconnect if not successful
\N3 MNP or normal — try MNP; fallback to normal async
\N4 LAPM only — try LAPM; disconnect if not successful
\N5 LAPM or normal — try LAPM; fallback to normal
\N6 LAPM or MNP — try both protocols; disconnect if not
successful
\N7 LAPM, MNP, or normal — try both protocols; fallback
to normal if not successful

Auto-Reliable Fallback Character %An


Select the ASCII character to be recognized as the auto-reliable fallback
character by the answering modem. During negotiation of protocol in
auto-reliable mode, the answering modem switches from reliable to
normal mode when receiving the auto-reliable fallback character from
the calling modem and passes the character to the serial port.
Enter the %An command to set the auto-reliable fallback character
(n=1-27 decimal representing an ASCII character).
Command Operation
%A0 Disable auto-reliable fallback character
%An Sets ASCII character to be recognized as the
auto-reliable fallback character

Note
The modem must be set for auto-reliable mode (AT\N3,
\N5, \N6, \N7).

6-6 Modem 3600


Protocols

Serial Port Flow Control \Q


The \Q commands set the type of flow control used by the serial port. If
the serial port speed exceeds that of the modem connection, characters
may be sent by the DTE to the modem faster than it can send them to the
remote modem. The modem holds characters in an internal buffer until
they can be transmitted. When this buffer is full, the modem uses flow
control to stop data from the DTE. As the modem continues to transmit
data and the buffer empties, flow control is again used to cause the DTE
to resume sending data.
• The \Q - \Q3 commands affect both DTE and DCE flow control.
• The \Q4 - \Q7 commands affect only flow control by the DCE.
• The \Q command disables flow control bilaterally.
When the \Q1 command is used, the modem generates and accepts
XON/XOFF characters to start and stop the data flow. These characters
have the same parity as the DTE setup taken from the last AT command.
When the \Q2 command is used, the modem uses CTS off to stop the
data from the DTE and CTS on to restart it.
When the \Q3 command is used, the modem uses CTS off to stop the
data from the DTE and CTS on to restart it. The DTE uses RTS off to
stop data from the modem and RTS on to restart it.
The \Q4 command disables flow control by the DCE.
The \Q5 command enables XON/XOFF flow control by the DCE only.
The \Q6 and \Q7 commands force the modem to use RTS off to stop
data from the modem and RTS on to restart it. This does not affect DTE
flow control.
Command Operation
\Q Disable bilateral flow control
\Q1 Enable bilateral XON/XOFF flow control
\Q2 Enable DTE CTS flow control, disable DCE flow
control
\Q3 Enable CTS/RTS bilateral flow control
\Q4 Disable DCE flow control

Modem 3600 6-7


Protocols

\Q5 Enable DCE XON/XOFF flow control


\Q6 Enable DCE RTS flow control
\Q7 Enable DCE RTS flow control

XON/XOFF Pass Through \X


This option is active when flow control of the modem by the DTE has
been selected for XON/XOFF and the connect mode is MNP-only or
normal. It enables or disables sending local flow control characters
(XON/XOFF) to the remote modem as well as being acted on in the
local modem. In MNP-only mode the modem treats incoming XON/
XOFF characters from the remote modem as data characters. In normal
mode the modem will look at the \G command and act accordingly.
IMPORTANT: With \X1 in effect, local flow control characters are
sent to the remote system. These characters may turn on the data flow
from the remote system before the modem is ready to receive more data,
possibly resulting in data loss.
Command Operation
\X Process but do not pass XON/XOFF characters to
remote DCE
\X1 Process and pass XON/XOFF characters to remote
DCE

Data Link Flow Control \G


This flow control paces data from the remote modem to the local
modem during a normal connection. When the \G1 command is sent,
the modem uses XON/XOFF to start/stop data transmission from the
remote modem. This command is ignored during an MNP connection.
Command Operation
\G Disable data link flow control
\G1 Enable data link flow control

6-8 Modem 3600


Protocols

Note
The Modem 3600 will transmit the XON/XOFF characters to
start/stop data transmission from the remote modem. The
Modem 3600 will not respond to the XON/XOFF characters.
This activity ensures that a false XON/XOFF is not detected
resulting in data loss.

Break Control \Kn


Use \Kn (n = 0-5) to indicate the action taken by the modem when a
break is encountered.
Command Operation
\K Break option 0
\K1 Break option 1
\K2 Break option 2
\K3 Break option 3
\K4 Break option 4
\K5 Break option 5

Conditions under which breaks may occur are explained below with
descriptions of the modem's response under the different \K command
break options.
A break is sent to the serial port while the modem is in connect state
during a reliable or normal connection (no protocol, data buffered).
Command Operation
\K, \K2, \K4 Enter command mode but do not send break to the
remote modem
\K1 Empty the data buffers and send break to the remote
modem
\K3 Immediately send break to the remote modem
\K5 Send break to the remote modem in sequence with any
data received from the serial port

Modem 3600 6-9


Protocols

A break is sent to the serial port while the modem is in connect state
during a direct connection (no protocol, data not buffered).
Command Operation
\K, \K2, \K4 Immediately send break to the remote modem and
enter command mode when break is through
\K1, \K3, \K5 Immediately send break to the remote modem

A break is received from the remote modem while the modem is in


connect state during a normal connection (no protocol, data buffered).
Command Operation
\K, \K1 Empty the data buffers and send break to the serial
port
\K2, \K3 Immediately send break to the serial port
\K4, \K5 Send break to the serial port in sequence with any
data received from the remote modem

A transmit break command is issued while the modem is in command


state during a reliable (protocol) or normal connection (no protocol,
data buffered).
Command Operation
\K, \K1 Empty data buffers and send break to the remote
modem
\K2, \K3 Immediately send break to the remote modem
\K4, \K5 Send break to the remote modem in sequence with
any data received from the serial port

Inactivity Timer \T
The \T command specifies the number of minutes the modem will stay
online without transmitting or receiving data before hanging up. When
the value is set to 0, the timer is disabled.
Command Operation
\T Disable inactivity timer
\Tn Set inactivity to n (n=1-255) minutes

6-10 Modem 3600


Protocols

Maximum Reliable Block Size \A


The \A command sets the maximum transmit block size for MNP
connections. Use this command to force the modem to transmit smaller
blocks in an MNP connection. A smaller block size maximizes
throughput when marginal line conditions are causing errors. The
modem sends a block up to the size specified by the \A command.
Command Operation
\A Maximum transmit block size = 64 characters
\A1 Maximum transmit block size = 128 characters
\A2 Maximum transmit block size = 192 characters
\A3 Maximum transmit block size = 256 characters

Transmit Break / Set Break Length \B


The \B commands tell the local modem to send a break signal to the
remote modem. In all modes except direct, S79 determines the length
of the break sent to the DTE by the modem receiving a break signal over
the link. S79 may be set directly or via \Bn where n=1-255 in 20 ms
increments. The default is 35 (700 ms).
Command Operation
\B Sends a break signal to the remote modem (does not
modify S79)
\Bn Sets S79 to length of break desired; n=1-255 in 20
ms increments; default= 35 (700 ms)

Set Auto-Reliable Buffer \C


This determines whether or not a modem in reliable mode will buffer
data received from a modem that is not in reliable mode during the 4
seconds in which the modems try to establish a reliable link. Use these
commands when the modem is in the auto-reliable mode and is expected
to process a call from a modem not in a reliable mode.
Command Operation
\C Disable auto reliable data buffer
\C1 Buffer data for 4 seconds or 200 characters

Modem 3600 6-11


Protocols

V.42bis Data Compression %C


The %C command determines application of data compression while
running LAPM protocol.
Command Operation
%C Data compression disabled
%C1 Enabled on transmit and receive data
%C2 Enabled on transmit data only (enhanced
compression)
%C3 Enabled on receive data only (enhanced
compression)

6-12 Modem 3600


Chapter 7
Test Mode Operation

Diagnostic tests are used to isolate faults in the communications path.


Diagnostic tests terminate after the period of time specified by S18. If
S18 is set to 0, the timer is disabled and tests will run continuously. Tests
may also be terminated by the &T command. When in test modes without
a test pattern, issue the escape sequence +++ to return to command mode
before terminating the test with the &T command.
Note
Local analog loopback with or without a test pattern is the only
test available in protocol mode.

Test Categories
Diagnostic tests fall into two categories: those that can be performed
online or offline and those that must be performed online. Refer to
Table 7-1.

Table 7-1. Diagnostic Test s


Test Offline Online
Local Analog Loopback (LAL) X X
Local Analog Loopback with Self Test (LAL/TP ) X X
Local Digital Loopback (LDL) X
Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) X
Remote Digital Loopback with Self Test (RDL/ X
TP)
Test Pattern (TP) X

Modem 3600 7-1


Test Mode Operation

Note
These tests do not apply to fax mode and should only be
performed when the modem is configured for data operation.
LDL, RDL, and RDL/TP tests are initiated after making an online data
connection in normal or direct mode only. LAL and LAL/TP are
initiated while in offline command mode. These tests can be initiated by
AT commands or by using the LCD front panel SELECT TEST menus.
Refer to Table 7-2.
Note
Bold text indicates command parameter defaults.

Table 7-2. Test Commands


Command Operation
&T Terminate any test
&T1 Initiate local analog loopback test
&T3 Initiate local digital loopback test
&T4 Grant remote requested digital loopback
&T5 Deny remote requested digital loopback
&T6 Initiate remote digital loopback test
&T7 Initiate remote digital loopback with test pattern
&T8 Initiate local analog loopback test with test pattern
%T Transmit test pattern

Terminating a Test in Progress &T


Tests can be terminated manually or automatically. The &T command
terminates a test manually. The modem automatically goes to command
mode during LDL, LAL/TP, and RDL/TP tests. Enter the &T command
to terminate the tests. For LAL and RDL, enter the escape sequence
(+++) before the &T command to go to the command mode.
By preloading register S18 with 1 to 255, each test mode automatically
times out after the specified number of seconds and exits back to the
command mode. Loading S18 with 0 disables the auto timeout feature
and the test will run continuously until manually terminated.

7-2 Modem 3600


Test Mode Operation

For example, to run the self test analog loopback test for 30 seconds,
enter
ATS18=30&T8

The modem should respond with 000 after 30 seconds.

Testing the Local Modem


Test local operation with the modem offline in command mode. Use
LAL and LAL/TP to test the local modem and the communications to
the local DTE.
Note
Figures 7-1 through 7-5 include LED test indications. These
indications are valid when DTE options are set by factory
option set #1 and RTS is active from the DTE. Where
indicated, RD and/or TD may be on, off, or flashing
depending on the type of DTE and its operating state.

Local Analog Loopback &T1


In Local Analog Loopback the modem transmitter connects to its
receiver so the analog signal normally sent over the telephone line is
received locally.
If operating on leased lines, the lines are terminated into 600 ohms
(Figure 7-1). If off hook on a dial-up line, the modem is forced on hook.

Figure 7-1. Local Analog Loopback


(4-Wire Operation and 2-Wire Operation)

Modem 3600 7-3


Test Mode Operation

For 2-wire operation, Analog Bilateral Loopback is invalid. In 4-wire


operation, Analog Bilateral Loopback connects the receive line to the
transmit line through a buffer amplifier.
Test the local DTE and cable by entering the &T1 command. Enter a test
message and verify it is echoed on the screen. If it is not returned
exactly as entered, the terminal equipment or data cable is at fault.
To determine if the data cable is defective replace it with a properly
configured cable with electrical continuity. If the cable checks out but
the problem remains, the DTE is defective.
If all local equipment checks out, proceed to the“Testing the Remote
Modem” section on page 7-5.
Issue an escape sequence followed by &T1 to exit analog loopback.

Local Analog Loopback with Self Test &T8


When the modem is offline in command mode, enter the &T8 command
to put the modem in Self Test Local Analog Loopback (Figure 7-2).
The modem transmits a test pattern. The test pattern is looped back to
the receiver and checked for errors. Entering the &T command causes
the modem to exit Self Test Analog Loopback. The modem responds
with a three digit value between 0 and 255 representing the number of
errors during test pattern detection. If errors occur, repeat the test to
verify the consistency of the problem.

Figure 7-2. Local Analog with Test Pattern

7-4 Modem 3600


Test Mode Operation

Testing the Remote Modem


Use LDL, RDL, and RDL/TP in the online data mode to test the remote
modem and phone line. Enter the escape sequence after making a
connection to return to command mode. The appropriate test command,
&T3, &T6, or &T7, can then be entered to initiate an online test.

Local Digital Loopback &T3


After making the data connection, enter the escape sequence to return to
command mode. Entering &T3 puts the local modem in digital
loopback. The remote operator can now send a test message which is
looped back to the remote terminal screen.
If the test timer (S18) was loaded before issuing the &T3 command the
local modem exits the test after the specified number of seconds and
returns to command mode. If not, enter &T to exit the test. Enter the
command to return to online data mode.
The local modem receiver connects to its transmitter so received data is
retransmitted to the remote site.
If Digital Bilateral Loopback is enabled locally, the local DTE is looped
back to itself (Figure 7-3). If disabled, the local DTE receives a constant
mark.

Figure 7-3. Local Digital Loopback with Bilateral Loopback


Enabled

Modem 3600 7-5


Test Mode Operation

Grant/Deny RDL Request &T4, &T5


Local operators can deny a request from the remote modem for remote
digital loopback.
To allow your modem to be placed in RDL by a remote operator, enter
AT&T4

To prevent your modem from entering RDL, enter


AT&T5

Remote Digital Loopback &T6


The initiating modem signals the remote modem to go to Digital
Loopback. The remote modem receives and then retransmits data back
to the local modem. If Digital Bilateral Loopback is enabled on the
remote modem, the remote DTE is looped back to itself (Figure 7-4).

Figure 7-4. Remote Digital Loopback with Digital Bilateral


Loop Enabled at the Remote Site

After making the data connection, enter the escape sequence to return to
command mode. Entering &T6 places the remote modem in digital
loopback provided the remote operator has entered the &T4 command
to allow an RL request. Enter a test message and verify the message is
being looped back to your terminal screen. If the message is incorrect,
use the analog loopback tests on both modems to isolate the problem. If
both modems run analog loopback without errors, the problem could be
with the phone line.

7-6 Modem 3600


Test Mode Operation

Remote Digital Loopback with Self Test &T7


After making the data connection, enter the escape sequence to return to
command mode. Entering &T7 places the remote modem in digital
loopback provided the remote operator enters &T4 to allow an RL
request. Once in RDL/TP, the local modem transmits a test pattern and
automatically verifies that the remote modem is looping the pattern back
(Figure 7-5). Enter &T to exit RDL/TP and return to command mode.
Enter the O command to return online in data mode.
Exiting RDL/TP the modem responds with a three digit value between 0
and 255 representing the number of errors which occurred during test
pattern detection. If errors occur, repeat the test several times to verify
the consistency of the problem, then use the analog loopback tests to
isolate the problem.

Figure 7-5. Local Modem Initiating Remote Digital Loopback


with Test Pattern

Test Pattern %T
In Test Pattern, transmitted data from the local DTE is blocked and
replaced by a V.52 compatible test pattern. When the modem transmits
the test pattern, it expects to receive the same pattern.

Bilateral Digital Test Enable / Disable *DG


Enable or disable bilateral test functions.
Command Operation
*DG Bilateral digital loop disabled
*DG1 Bilateral digital loop enabled

Modem 3600 7-7


Test Mode Operation

DTE Controlled Remote Digital Loopback (Pin 21) *RD


To enable DTE Controlled Remote Digital Loopback, enter *RD1.
Enabled, the modem goes into Remote Digital Loopback when it detects
an off-to-on transition of pin 21 while in the online data mode. The test
ends when it detects an on-to-off transition of pin 21 and then returns to
online data mode. To disable this function enter the *RD command.
Command Operation
*RD Ignore pin 21
*RD1 RDL enabled (pin 21)

Note
If the test timeout option is enabled and pin 21 remains high,
the modem returns to online mode at the end of the test
timeout period and does not re-enter the test mode until an
off-to-on transition of pin 21 is detected.

DTE Controlled Local Analog Loopback (Pin 18) *LA


To enable DTE Controlled Local Analog Loopback Test, enter *LA1.
Enabled, the modem goes into local analog loopback when it detects an
off-to-on transition of pin 18. The test ends when it detects an on-to-off
transition of pin 18. To disable, enter *LA.
Command Operation
*LA Ignore pin 18
*LA1 LAL enabled (pin 18)

Note
If the test timeout option is enabled and pin 18 remains high,
the modem returns to idle mode at the end of the test timeout
period and does not re-enter the test mode until an off-to-on
transition of pin 18 has been detected.

7-8 Modem 3600


Chapter 8
Security

The Modem 3600 series provides three features to assure secure operation
of the modem. These features are front panel password protection, auto
callback, and secure mode of operation. Front panel password protection is
discussed in Chapter 4.
Two levels of major security operation are available: high and low. The AT
commands for each level are explained below.
IMPORTANT: Security requires that you have available your “superuser”
password, explained in the “Superuser” section on page 8-6 and in the
“Setting Passwords $Pn=pw$pw” section on pa ge8-8. Systems adminis-
trator functions cannot be accessed without this password. If you forget
the superuser password, contact Technical Support. Refer to “Calling
Technical Support” section on pa ge12-2.

Autocallback Security
Autocallback is an additional security feature that is separate from Low
and High Security. Autocallback forces an answering modem to dial the
selected autodial (*AUn) telephone number after answering a call, holding
the line for one second, and then disconnecting. When autocallback is
enabled the modem will not train on a direct call. Access autocallback via
Main Menu #5 on the LCD. Refer to Chapter 4 for further information.
S72 enables/disables autocallback. S78 determines the delay in seconds
before autocallback is initiated.

Modem 3600 8-1


Security

Low Security Operation


Low security operation provides password protection against
unauthorized dial-up access. High security is another feature which is
discussed later in the “High Security” section on pa ge8-4. The security
feature can be enabled/disabled with AT commands when operating on a
dial-up system.
Transmitted data and received data lines are suppressed to the host DTE
during security validation; all other signals (CTS, DSR, RI, etc.) operate
as selected. After the password has been validated, the modem operates
normally.

Operating without Low Security


The modem is not factory set for security and operates like a standard
V.34, except for additional AT commands which allow access to
security. With these commands a user can set passwords and turn
security on. When security is enabled, a password must be used to
change security options.

Operating with Low Security


A secure modem will not allow data transfer between its host and a
remote host until a correct password is received from the calling party.
If an incorrect password is received the secure modem disconnects. The
front panel is not locked out because this type of security prevents
unauthorized dial-up access.

Remote Operation
The originating modem must transmit the correct security code before
the secure modem will allow data transfer. If accessing a secure remote
modem, the local modem prompts the user with
PLEASE ENTER YOUR PASSWORD ?
To respond to the password prompt, enter
AT$

followed by the password.

8-2 Modem 3600


Security

After receiving the $, the secure remote modem accepts the security
code and waits for a carriage return. Entering more than ten characters is
invalid and causes the secure modem to disconnect. Entering a valid
password causes the calling party's DTE to display PASSWORD
ACCEPTED.

Local Operation
When accessing the local modem, the password is not required except
when the user wants to change a security option. To change a password
or to turn security on or off, the user must enter a password when
entering the appropriate AT commands. EIA-232 signals to the DTE are
not affected by security in command mode.

Passwords
Two passwords of up to ten characters each can be stored in the
modem's nonvolatile memory. AT commands change the passwords.
Backspace and escape keys are not supported for password entry. The
passwords can consist of any printable characters except a dollar sign,
comma, or space. Passwords are case sensitive.
The passwords have the same priority level and are interchangeable
with each other. This can be helpful in situations such as when the user
forgets one of the passwords.

LCD Indication of Security


The front panel LCD indicates whether security is on or off. If disabled,
the LCD appears as if the security does not exist. If enabled, Main Menu
#1 consists of the following display:
SECURE 33600
XXXX

Restrictions in Security Operation


If the caller gives the wrong password, while security is enabled, the
modem will disconnect.

Low Security Commands


The following AT commands operate low security:

Modem 3600 8-3


Security

Set Password $S=x


The $S=x command sets an empty password location to x. This
command only applies when no password or only one is stored in
memory. It cannot be used to change a password.

Changing a Password $C=x, y


The $C=x,y command changes either password where x represents the
old password and y is new one.

Deleting a Password $C=x, -


The $C=x,- command deletes password x from memory. Security is
automatically disabled if the last password is deleted.

Security Reset $DR


This command resets security to its initial state (off with no passwords
stored). The option is not available in remote configuration.

Disabling Security $D=x


The $D=x command disables security where x is either password.

Security Status $D?, $E?


The $D? or $E? command displays the current status of security
(on or off).

Enabling Security $E=x


The $E=x command enables security where x is either password.

High Security
Compatibility
An originating modem does not require security capabilities to connect
with a secured Modem 3600. Access to the Modem 3600 host is gained
by following the appropriate logon procedure as described in following
text. All security operations are controlled by the secured Modem 3600.

Capacity
The modem stores in nonvolatile memory the password, security level,
callback phone number, and status information for 50 users.

8-4 Modem 3600


Security

Operating without High Security


The modem is factory set with security disabled. In this mode the local
DTE is connected to the local modem as usual, but the command to
enable or view the status of the security feature will be accepted and
processed.

Operating with High Security


With high security enabled, each user must follow the appropriate logon
procedure. The procedure for remote users is determined by their
assigned security level. Upon termination of the connection, the secured
modem waits for the next call and password sequence. A local user must
logon to the secured Modem 3600 to use the unit.
If a power outage occurs, the logged -on user must logon again when the
power is restored. For optimum security operation a reliable connection
should be used.

Security Levels
The Modem 3600 provides three levels of security to prevent
unauthorized access by a remote user.

Level 1: Password Only


This is the lowest level of dial-up security. The user dialing in is
prompted for an ID and password; if invalid, the modem hangs up.

Level 2: Password with Callback


This security level also accepts only calls from preset telephone
numbers. After the user enters a correct ID and password, the modem
looks up the telephone number and calls the user back at that number.

Level 3: Password with Callback and Password Re-


Entry
This is the highest level of security and is similar to Password with
Callback except that after the user answers the callback call, the modem
prompts again for the password.

Modem 3600 8-5


Security

Superuser
The superuser has access to all user information for administrative
purposes and can change user logon requirements and privileges.
Superuser status can be gained at the local modem or from a remote
modem via remote configuration, if the “Remote Superuser” option is
enabled.
The superuser must first logon as a regular user, then request the
superuser privilege.
Incorrect attempts to gain superuser privilege are logged in the user’s
status information field in nonvolatile memory. After seven invalid
attempts, the user is suspended from access to the Modem 3600 until
cleared by the superuser.
To reinstate a suspended user, logon as a different regular user, then
request superuser privilege in order to clear the illegal attempts count.
If the local superuser disables security, the only security commands
available are those used to enable security or to check security status.

Passwords
Passwords can be changed or deleted by the superuser. The regular user
can change his password only if the “user changes” option has been
enabled by the superuser. Refer to the “Extended Features $W” section
on page 8-9 for more details.
When calling from a remote location, the user is prompted for a
password. After the password is entered, the user is either allowed direct
access or disconnected and called back depending on the assigned
security level.
During password entry or logon, each password character is displayed
as an X on the DTE screen. The backspace key can be used for editing.
For remote logon, press the Esc key at any time before pressing Enter
to clear the password entry.
Incorrect password attempts exceeding the threshold set in S77 for a
specific user will cause the modem to disconnect. Each call exceeding
the threshold increments the ILLEGAL ATTEMPTS counter by one.

8-6 Modem 3600


Security

After seven calls (the default in remote configuration), the ILLEGAL


ATTEMPTS counter will have reached maximum and the user will be
suspended.

Default Passwords
The modem is shipped from the factory with a default password for the
superuser and for one regular user. They are
• SUPERUSER (System administrator)
• USER 1 (User number 1)
Passwords for users 2 through 50 are left blank.
It is recommended that the superuser change the default SUPERUSER
and USER 1 passwords as soon as possible.

High Security Commands


These commands are only available to a local superuser.

Enabling High Security $EH=pw


The $EH=pw command enables high security, where pw is the
superuser’s password.
To initialize high security for the first time enter
AT$EH=SUPERUSER

To enable security, enter


AT$1=USER1

followed by
AT$S=SUPERUSER

to gain superuser status. Passwords, security levels, and callback


numbers can now be entered or modified.
When superuser activities are completed, return to regular user status by
entering AT$$. In regular user status, AT$$ is the final local logoff
command.

Disabling High Security $D


Enter the $D command to disable security. The modem will operate as a
nonsecure unit except that it will respond to enable and check security
status commands.

Modem 3600 8-7


Security

Setting Passwords $Pn=pw$pw


Select a password between 4 and 34 printable ASCII characters.
To store the password enter
AT$Pn=pw$pw

where n is the user number (0-50) and pw is the new password which is
entered twice to ensure that is has been entered correctly.
The $ character is used as the marker between the dual password entries
and cannot be used as part of the password.
Passwords cannot be recalled from nonvolatile memory.
Note
The superuser password is critical because the security
feature cannot be configured without it.
After logon as USER 1 and gaining superuser privileges, enter the $Pn
command to modify passwords.
For the superuser enter
AT$P0=pw$pw

For user 1 enter:


AT$P1=pw$pw

Record the passwords in your personal records.


IMPORTANT: Systems administrator functions cannot be accessed
without it. If you forget the superuser password, contact Technical
Support. Refer to the “Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2.

Set Security Levels $Ln=m


The System Administrator (superuser) assigns each user with a security
level by entering the $Ln=m command where n is the user number and
m is the security level.

Set User Callback Number $Cn=m


The callback number, used with level 2 or 3 security, is dialed by the
modem after a user has successfully called in from a remote location
and entered his password.

8-8 Modem 3600


Security

Level 1 security does not require a callback number; however, if the


security level is changed to level 2 or 3 a callback number will be
required.
The callback number should be programmed initially using the $Cn=m
command. Where n is the user number and m is the callback number.

Extended Features $W
$W1
A regular user can change his password and callback number if the local
superuser has enabled the $W1 option.
$W2
A remote regular user can gain superuser privilege once the local
superuser has enabled the $W2 command.
$W0
The extended feature options can be cleared by a local superuser by
entering the $W0 command.

Display Extended Feature Status $W?


Enter the $W? command to display the status of the user changes and
remote superuser options.

Display / Reset Illegal Access Attempt Counters $M,


$Mn, $M*
These commands inform the superuser of any illegal attempts to gain
superuser status and the users current status. The status will either be
"normal," indicating the user is still able to logon to the secure Modem
3600, or "suspended," indicating that the user made more than seven
illegal attempts to gain superuser status and has been automatically
suspended.
When the superuser logs on, the secure Modem 3600 automatically
displays any illegal attempts since the last superuser logon. If it is not
reset, the illegal attempt count will remain and the superuser will not be
reminded unless more illegal attempts occur. To manually request this
same information enter
AT$M

Modem 3600 8-9


Security

The Modem 3600 responds by scrolling any illegal attempt information


onto the screen as in the following example:
USER NUMBER: 01, ILLEGAL
ATTEMPTS: 1,
STATUS: NORMAL
USER NUMBER: 14, ILLEGAL
ATTEMPTS: 7,
STATUS: SUSPENDED
OK
Enter the $Mn command (where n equals user number) to reset a
specific user's illegal attempt count.
Enter the $M* command to reset all of the user’s illegal attempt counts.

Factory Reset $F=pw$pw


To reinitialize the security feature enter the $F=pw$pw command
(where pw is the "current" superuser password). This command deletes
all user information and reinstates factory default passwords. User
information cannot be recalled.

Removing a User $Rn


This superuser command removes a user from active status without
deleting all of the user’s information. The user can be restored to active
status by setting the password with the corresponding user number as
previously mentioned. To remove a user, enter
AT$Rn

where n is the user numbers 2-50.


The superuser or user with ID #1 cannot be deleted from the user list.

Security Status $E?


System security status can be verified using the $E? command.

Display User Status $S?


Enter the $S? command to indicate whether or not the current user has
superuser status.
The Modem 3600 responds with one of the following responses:
SUPERUSER STATUS
NORMAL STATUS

8-10 Modem 3600


Security

Verify User Information $In, $IBn


Security level and callback number can be displayed using either the
$In or $IBn command. To display the assigned security level and
callback number for a single user enter
AT$In

where n is the user number. A regular user can only check his own
information. A user with superuser privileges can check any user's
information.
A user with superuser privileges can also display the assigned security
level and callback number for each valid user within a block of ten
consecutive user numbers by entering:
AT$IBn

where n is the first user number.

Request Superuser Privilege $S=pw


Once logged on as a user, superuser privilege can be requested by
entering the $S=pw command, where pw is the superuser password.
When the correct password has been entered, the Modem 3600 responds
with
SUPERUSER STATUS
OK

Local Logon Command $n=pw


Enter the $n=pw command to logon locally to the secure Modem 3600
where n is the user number and pw is the password.

Local Logoff Command $$


To logoff after a local session enter
AT$$

Remote Logon Procedure $n=pw


The remote logon procedure is required to access a secure Modem 3600.
When calling into the secure Modem 3600 from a remote location the
user is prompted to enter a password. The password must be entered as
$n=pw

where n is the user number and pw is the user’s password.

Modem 3600 8-11


Security

If the password entry is incorrect, the password entry field will be


cleared and the remote user will be allowed further entries until the
number of invalid attempts matches the lockout threshold stored in S77.
At this point the secure Modem 3600 drops the call.
If the password entry is correct the secure modem sends the
PASSWORD ACCEPTED message to the remote site. Depending on
the assigned security level, the user is given
• Immediate access to the DTE connected to the secure modem,
• A callback sequence, or
• A callback with password reentry.
When the call is terminated from either end the secure Modem 3600
automatically resets itself to the secure mode for the next remote or
local user.
While a remote caller is initiating a call to the secure Modem 3600, all
status messages and control leads which would notify the local DTE of
the incoming call are suppressed. The secure Modem 3600 uses the
value stored in S0 to determine the number of rings on which to
autoanswer. If S0 is set to 0 incoming calls will not be answered.
If a local user is logged on during an incoming call, a RING message is
displayed but the call will not be answered until the local user logs off,
issues an A command, or presses the TALK/DATA button.
If the local user logs off, the call will be answered and the remote user
must follow the normal password procedure. If the local user enters A or
presses TALK/DATA the call to the remote user connects normally.

8-12 Modem 3600


Chapter 9
Fax Operation

The Modem 3600 can send and receive fax documents at speeds up to
14,400 bps, with the appropriate software. As a fax modem, the modem
conforms to EIA-578, which defines a standard interface between a PC
with fax software and the DCE as a fax modem.
When used with a Class 1 fax software package, Modem 3600 is CCITT
Group 3 compatible and can send and receive documents at 2400, 4800,
7200, 9600, 12,000, or 14,400 bps with any Group 3 fax machine or PC
with a fax modem.
Service Class selection configures the modem for Class 0 data mode or
Class 1 fax mode. The LCD display indicates when fax mode is enabled.
The Modem 3600 default configuration is for data mode; Service Class is
normally only changed by the software as necessary.
Previous chapters in this manual contain information about the modem
that should be understood prior to fax operation.
Read the fax software manual before attempting fax communications.

Fax Operation
The user's manual for the Class 1 fax software package should provide
most information necessary to configure the software and send and receive
faxes.
The information in Chapter 2 of this manual should be considered as well,
and the “Modem Initialization” section on page9-2 provides important
information for proper fax communications.

Modem 3600 9-1


Fax Operation

Modem Initialization
For fax operation, most fax software packages are equipped with a fax
initialization command string. Entering this command sets the active
profile for fax operation. In some cases certain options should be
modified for particular requirements. The fax software manual provides
information about requirements.

Fax Defaults
Factory defaults, along with the initialization command, support fax
operation. Some initialization commands include the default command
&F and will reissue it for each fax operation. Some fax software
packages do not include the default command, or only issue the default
command when the fax software is first loaded. Subsequent fax
operations may not reset the fax profile and, if a fax required option has
been changed, fax operation will not work.
An example of a fax initialization command is
AT&F V E S0=0

This can be interpreted as:


AT&FReset the active profile to the factory default.
V Set response messages to digit code.
E Disable local echo (off).
S0=0 Disable autoanswer (off).

Fax Autoanswer
Some fax software takes control of autoanswer, disables autoanswer for
the modem, and answers the phone as internally programmed. Other
programs do not control autoanswer at all and require the modem to
have autoanswer enabled. You must check the software manual for the
particular requirements and refer to Chapte r4 for manual/autoanswer
and TALK/DATA selection. Select the necessary options for fax
operation.

9-2 Modem 3600


Fax Operation

Fax Associated Options


A number of options can be changed without any effect on fax
operation. These include items like speaker volume and pause for
carrier. Appendix E lists the AT commands. These commands can be
incorporated by personal preference into the initialization command.
Compare fax operation requirements with Appendi xA and if necessary
generate an initialization command string compatible with the software
and the modem.

Stored Fax Profile


Another alternative is to develop a fax initialization command and store
it in one of the user defined profiles. Fax initialization would include the
command that recalls that profile for fax operation. Keep track of option
changes between fax transmissions and if required reset the fax profile
for the next fax transmission.

Class 1 Details
Operation as a fax modem complies with EIA-578; details of Class 1
operation and compatibility are found in that standard. There is no need
to be familiar with these details since they are handled by the Class 1
software package, but this section briefly summarizes some of them.
As a Service Class 1 facsimile DCE, the Modem 3600 provides the
basic services required to support Group 3 facsimile operation. Support
from a Class 1 facsimile DTE is required to implement the CCITT T.30
recommendations for fax document transmission and the CCITT T.4
recommendations for encoding fax images. Using software control, the
modem can:
• Connect calls
• Generate messages
• Detect waiting and silence
• Transmit and receive data
• Provide HDLC data framing, transparency, and error detection
The modem also filters data streams to and from the DTE in accordance
with the Class 1 specification.

Modem 3600 9-3


Fax Operation

The Class 1 standard assumes a serial asynchronous DTE-DCE


connection using EIA-232D (or CCITT V.24) circuits. EIA-232D
circuits AB (signal ground), BA (transmitted data), and BB (received
data) are required for fax operation, while additional circuits are
optional. Refer to Chapter 2 for hardware installation and EIA-232D
data interface information.
The modem uses inband unidirectional DC1/DC3 (XON/XOFF) flow
control to match the DTE-DCE data rate to the line signaling rate
(hardware RTS/CTS is optional). Since 1200 bps is the minimum rate
needed to support T.30 Phase C data transfer using V.29 9600 bps, a
serial port data rate of at least 19,200 bps should be used with the
modem. Since flow control is used, this rate should not be changed
during fax operation. The modem detects the DTE-DCE data rate from
the AT command prefix as described in Chapte r5.

Class 1 Commands
The commands in this section are normally issued by the fax software
and not by the user. They are provided here for reference. While only
the lower order 7 bits of each character are used for commands and
parameters, T.30 Phase C data transmission or reception requires all 8
data bits. Therefore, a data format which uses 8 data bits should be used
for fax mode.

Dial Command D
The dial command D, described in Chapter 5, tells the modem to go off
hook, dial, and begin call origination. For fax operation, set the modem
for Service Class 1 operation before the dial command is issued; use the
+FCLASS=1 command.
The dial modifiers, except R, can also be used in fax mode. Depending
on the X option selected, the modem will return the BUSY and NO
DIALTONE result codes as appropriate. If the modem is in the online
command state when a dial command is issued (e.g., a connection has
already been established), the modem returns an ERROR result code.
The NO CARRIER result code indicates that a connection could not be
established (no carrier detected) within the number of seconds specified
in status register S7, or the dial command has been aborted due to a
character sent from the DTE.

9-4 Modem 3600


Fax Operation

After dialing the specified number in fax mode, the modem generates
1100 Hz CNG tones in accordance with T.30 while trying to detect
either CED (answer back tone) or the HDLC preamble of the first T.30
frame. The CNG tones cease after detecting either of these two signals.
To allow proper interaction with manually answered fax stations,
detection of CED is not required. After detecting 1650 Hz (i.e., the
HDLC preamble of the first frame), the modem enters V.21 Channel 2
receive state with HDLC framing and returns a CONNECT result code.
This is because dialing in fax mode (+FCLASS=1) implies an initial
+FRH=3 command described in the “Fax Transmit and Receive Modes”
section on pa ge9-7.

Answer Command A
The A command instructs the modem to answer the call. For fax
operation, set the modem for Service Class 1 operation before the A
command is issued; use the +FCLASS=1 command.
If the modem is in the online command state when an answer command
is issued (e.g., a connection is already established), the modem returns
an ERROR result code. Otherwise, it answers the call and generates a
2100 Hz CED (answer back) tone in accordance with T.30. The modem
then enters V.21 Channel 2 transmit state with HDLC framing and
returns a CONNECT result code. This is because answering a call in
fax mode (+FCLASS=1) implies an initial +FTH=3 command
described in the “Fax Transmit and Receive Modes” section on
page 9-7. To allow proper interaction with a manually originated fax
call (in accordance with T.30), the modem does not require detection of
CNG before generating CED or entering HDLC transmit mode.
If the DTE sends a character while executing the answer command and
before CED is completed, the call is released and the modem will send
the NO CARRIER result code.

On Hook H
In fax mode, the H command instructs the modem to stop any
transmission and terminate the call by going on hook.

Modem 3600 9-5


Fax Operation

Off Hook H1
The H1 command instructs the modem to go off hook. In fax mode, this
might be used when the user has used manual dialing to place a fax call.
In this case, no CNG tones are generated and the initial +FRH=3 is not
implied; it must be explicitly issued by the software.

Class 0 Operation +FCLASS=0


Setting the Service Class to 0 with the +FCLASS=0 command sets the
modem in data mode. This default setting is normally only changed by
software if needed.

Class 1 Operation +FCLASS=1


Setting the Service Class to 1 with the +FCLASS=1 command
configures the modem as a Class 1 fax modem. This command is
normally only issued by the fax software if needed. When set, the LCD
displays FAX CLASS 1 MODE.

Service Class Indication +FCLASS?


The current Service Class setting can be determined with the
+FCLASS? command. A 0 response indicates the modem is configured
for data mode while a 1 indicates it is set for fax mode. This information
text is preceded and followed by <CR><LF> in addition to being
followed by an appropriate result code response.

Service Class Capabilities +FCLASS=?


The available Service Classes can be revealed by the +FCLASS=?
command. The modem responds with the information text 0, 1
(preceded and followed by <CR><LF>), indicating that the modem
supports both data communication and Class 1 fax operation.

Transmit Silence +FTS=(Time)


The command +FTS=(Time) causes the modem to wait in silence for
the specified amount of time and then send the OK result code to the
DTE. The (Time) value is in 10 ms increments from 0 to 2.55
seconds. The modem aborts the command and sends an OK result code
if the DTE sends an additional character, which is discarded, during the
command execution. This command returns an ERROR result code if
issued while the modem is on hook.

9-6 Modem 3600


Fax Operation

Receive Silence +FRS=(Time)


The command +FRS= causes the modem to listen for silence and report
back an OK result code when the line has been silent for the specified
amount of time. The (Time) value is in 10 ms increments from 0 to
2.55 seconds.
The modem aborts the command and sends an OK result code if the
DTE sends an additional character, which is discarded, during the
command execution. This command returns an ERROR result code if
issued while the modem is on hook.

Fax Transmit and Receive Modes


The following commands instruct the modem to transmit or receive
facsimile data with the designated modulation. Flow control, data
buffering, and data filtering are used as appropriate, in accordance with
the Class 1 specification. Each of these commands must be the last
command on the command line.
Command Operation
+FTM=(MOD) Transmit data with (MOD) carrier
+FRM=(MOD) Receive data with (MOD) carrier
+FTH=(MOD) Transmit HDLC data with (MOD) carrier
+FRH=(MOD) Receive HDLC data with (MOD) carrier

The modem accepts one of the values listed in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1. Values for Fax Modulatio n


Value Modulation Speed
3 V.21 channel 2 300 bps
24 V.27 ter 2400 bps
48 V.27 ter 4800 bps
72 V.29 7200 bps
73 V.17 7200 bps
74 V.17 7200 bps *
96 V.29 9600 bps
97 V.17 9600 bps
*with short train

Modem 3600 9-7


Fax Operation

Table 9-1. Values for Fax Modulation (Continued)


Value Modulation Speed
98 V.17 9600 bps *
121 V.17 12000 bps
122 V.17 12000 bps *
145 V.17 14400 bps
146 V.17 14400 bps*
*with short train

The Modem 3600 returns an ERROR result code if any of the above
commands are issued while the modem is on hook.

Facsimile Transmit +FTM=(Mod)


+FTM=(Mod) causes the modem to transmit data using the modulation
and speed selected with the (Mod) parameter. For V.27 ter, V.29, and
V.17 modulations, the modem first transmits the required training
sequence (with echo protector tone). After it is appropriately configured
for transmission, the modem returns the CONNECT result code and
transmits constant 1 bits until data is received from the DTE. For
additional information, consult the Class 1 specification.

Facsimile Receive +FRM=(Mod)


+FRM=(Mod) causes the modem to receive data using the modulation
and speed selected with the (Mod) parameter. If the selected carrier is
detected, a CONNECT result code is sent to the DTE; if a different
signal is detected, the modem sends a +FCERROR (CONNECT
ERROR) result code and returns to command mode. This command is
aborted if the DTE sends any character to the modem other than DC1 or
DC3 during this mode. For additional information, consult the Class 1
specification.

9-8 Modem 3600


Fax Operation

HDLC Transmit +FTH=(Mod)


+FTH=(Mod) causes the modem to transmit HDLC framed data using
the modulation and speed selected with the (Mod) parameter. For V.27
ter, V.29, and V.17 modulations, the modem will first transmit the
required training sequence (with echo protector tone). Configured for
HDLC transmission, the modem transmits HDLC flags and returns the
CONNECT result code. HDLC flags will continue to be sent until the
first byte of data is received from the DTE or until 5 seconds elapses
with no data. For more information, refer to the Class 1 specification.

HDLC Receive +FRH=(Mod)


The command +FRH=(Mod) causes the modem to receive HDLC
framed data using the modulation and speed selected with the (Mod)
parameter. If the selected carrier is detected, a CONNECT result code is
sent to the DTE; if a different signal is detected, the modem sends a
+FCERROR (CONNECT ERROR) result code and returns to
command mode. This command will be aborted if the DTE sends any
character to the modem other than DC1 or DC3 during this mode. For
additional information, consult the Class 1 specification.

Test Supported Range of Values +FTx=?, +FRx=?


The supported range of values for any of the fax transmit or receive
commands can be determined with the +FTx=? or +FRx=? command
where x is M, H, or S. The normal transmit and receive capabilities are
interrogated with +FTM=? and +FRM=?, while the HDLC transmit and
receive capabilities are interrogated with +FTH=? and +FRH=?. Since
the modem can send and receive normal data or HDLC data at all valid
speeds up to 14,400 bps, the modem returns the information text 3, 24,
48, 72, 73, 74, 96, 97, 98, 121, 122, 145, 146 for any of these four
commands if x is M or H. For the commands +FTS=? or +FRS=? the
modem returns the information text 0-255, indicating an allowed time
interval from 0 to 2.55 seconds. The appropriate information text is
always preceded and followed by <CR><LF> and followed by an
appropriate result code response.

Modem 3600 9-9


Fax Operation

Class 1 Result Code +FCERROR


If the modem detects any carrier or tone that differs from that specified
in a +FRM or +FRH command, it sends the +FCERROR result code
and returns to command state, allowing the DTE to attempt a recovery.
The numeric form of this response is +F4.

Fax Autoanswer +FAA=


The modem can be set up to automatically detect if a fax or data call is
being answered. The command +FAA=1 enables this function and
+FAA=0 disables it. This feature requires special support by the fax
software package.
Command Description
+FAA=0 Disable fax autoanswer
+FAA=1 Enable fax autoanswer

DTE Autobaud for Fax Autoanswer *FR


Set the fax autoanswer feature to autobaud at 19.2 kbps or greater, if
desired.
Command Description
*FR Forced to > = 19,200 bps
*FR1 Forced to = 19,200 bps
*FR? Display this option’s current status

Binary File Transfer


Some Class 1 software packages may provide an option for transferring
files between computers with fax modems, using a Binary File Transfer
(BFT) standard. Although the received file is not a fax image,
transmitting the file is similar to sending a fax. Since the modem allows
T.30 error correction mode (with HDLC framing up to 9600 bps), fax
mode can also be used for BFT if supported by the Class 1 software
package. The Binary File Transfer is an option in the fax software
package, not a separate mode of operation.

9-10 Modem 3600


Chapter 10
Status Registers

S-Registers
Most modem configuration information is stored in a part of memory
called status (S) registers. During operation this information is used to
determine modem functions.
Information stored in S-registers can be changed by the AT or V.25
command sets and by pushbuttons in response to the LCD prompt. These
are the preferred methods. Some software programs also access
S-registers by the AT command set, but this action is transparent to the
user. The command indicates which memory bit(s) to alter to select an
option or to perform a function. The S-register values comprise the
configuration profile.
Generally, the user should not directly alter S-register values. However,
the user has the option of entering S-registers via ATS commands and
directly altering the register value. This is called "writing" to an S-register.
Note
Writing to an S-register is not a preferred method and should
only be used by programmers who need to manipulate
S-registers so they can interact with a software program under
development or a similar activity.
Some S-registers cannot be altered by the ATS command series. These are
called “read only” S-registers. In addition to the definitions in this chapter,
Appendix E contains a quick list of S-registers and indicates if they are
read only or read and write.
Figure 10-1 shows how the inputs to an S-register (S22 in this example)
are used to select a particular option. Bits 3 and 2 of S22 control speaker
options. Some communication software packages may use theAT
command set. For example purposes, bit values are arbitrary.

Modem 3600 10-1


Status Registers

Bit values for S-registers must not be confused with the total register
value. Bit values are counted separately for each option group, called bit
mapping, while the register value is the cumulative decimal or
hexadecimal total. The decimal value counts all eight bits as a single
group. Hexadecimal values split the bits into two groups of four each.
Writing to an S-register changes the total value. Figure 10-2 shows the
difference between decimal calculation and hexadecimal calculation.

Figure 10-1. Changing S-Register Values

Figure 10-2. Calculating S-Register Values

10-2 Modem 3600


Status Registers

S-Register Operation Sn?, Sn?^


Enter ATSn? to read a register value, where n=register number for a
decimal value or ATSn?^ for a hexadecimal value.
For example, to determine the current backspace character enter
ATS5?

The screen will show the ASCII value of the backspace character stored
in register S5.

Changing Register Values Sn=v, Sn=^v


To change an option using ATS commands requires the operator to
precalculate the revised decimal (or hexadecimal) total.
Note
Because of the chance of miscalculating the bit sum,
causing unplanned option changes, writing to an
S-register is discouraged. For operators who prefer this
method of option selection a much simplified command
that eliminates the decimal calculation is explained in the
“Individual Bit Command Sn . # =v” section on pa ge10-4.
To change a register value, enter
ATSn=v

where n = register number and v = decimal value, or enter


ATSn=^v

where ^v = hexadecimal value.


Note
Not all registers can be set by the ATSn=v (or ^v) command.
Some registers are for reference only.
To change the escape character from + to the Esc key (ASCII value of
27) enter
ATS2=27

To return the modem to the command mode press the Esc key three
times:
(pause) Esc Esc Esc (pause)

Modem 3600 10-3


Status Registers

Individual Bit Command Sn . # =v


Some operators use AT commands as the primary method of changing
S-register options. However, some options stored in registers do not
have an associated AT command. For these options, the individual bit
AT command can be used to change the setting of the bit controlling the
option.
To change a single bit value within a register, enter
ATSn.#=v

where n = register number, # = bit position 0 through 7, and v = bit


value 1 or 0.
For example, S-register 27, bit 2, selects between dial-up or leased line
operation:
AT command method:
AT&L selects dial-up operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 0).
AT&L1 selects leased line operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 1).
Individual bit method:
ATS27.2=0 selects dial-up operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 0)
ATS27.2=1 selects leased line operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 1)
Note
This way of selecting options can be used on all S-registers
except read only registers.

Autoanswer S0
This register turns the autoanswer option on or off. Set the register to 0
to turn autoanswer off.
Set the register to any value other than zero (1-255) to turn autoanswer
on. The number selected is the ring count the modem answers on. For
example, if S0 equals 4, the modem answers the call on the fourth ring.
The default value is 1.

Ring Count S1
This register contains the ring count for a current incoming call and
should not be changed. If you are developing communications software,
the program can read the register to determine the ring total.

10-4 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Escape Character S2
The standard escape character is a + sign (ASCII value of 43). To
change the character, set S2 to the desired ASCII value (0-127). To
disable the escape command, set S2 to any value greater than 127
(128-255).

End-of-Line Character S3
The standard end-of-line character is the carriage return (ASCII value of
13). This character ends each command as it is sent to the modem. It is
also sent by the modem after each status message or number code. To
change the character, set S3 to the desired ASCII value (0-127).

Line-Feed Character S4
The standard character is the line feed (ASCII value of 10). This
character is sent by the modem after each status message. To change it,
set S4 as desired (0-127).

Backspace Character S5
The standard character is the backspace (ASCII value of 8). To change
it, set S5 to the desired value (0-127).

Pause Before Dialing S6


When dial tone detection is disabled (command X, X1, or X3 in effect),
the modem waits the number of seconds (0-255) stored in this register
before dialing. The default value is 2 (seconds).

Pause for Ringback and Carrier Detection /


Wait for 2nd Dial Tone S7
If ringback is not detected in the number of seconds in S7 (1-255), the
modem disconnects and sends the NO CARRIER message or code. If
ringback is detected, the modem begins to look for a carrier.
If carrier is not detected within the number of seconds in S7, the modem
hangs up and sends the NO CARRIER message or code.
Values between 1 and 255 may be used. The default value is 30
(seconds).

Modem 3600 10-5


Status Registers

Pause Interval for Comma S8


When a dial command contains a comma, the modem pauses the
number of seconds in S8. Change S8 to change the basic pause interval
(0-255), or use several commas in a row for greater delay during dialing.
The default value is 2 (seconds).

Carrier Detect Time S9


S9 contains the amount of time (0-255) in 0.1 second increments that
the carrier must be present to be recognized. The default value is 6
(0.6 second). This timer can be extended to lessen the likelihood of false
detection of carrier.

Lost Carrier Detect Time S10


S10 contains the amount of time (0-255) in 0.1 second increments that
the carrier must be absent to be recognized as a loss of carrier. The
default value is 14 (1.4 seconds).

DTMF Tone Duration S11


S11 determines the length of DTMF tones. The period of silence is
equal to the duration of the tone. The value of this register must be
entered in multiples of 10. Default value is 80 (80 ms).

Escape Sequence Pause S12


The escape sequence to return to command mode from data mode
requires two pauses, one before and one after the escape characters.
The pauses prevent the modem from responding to a character sequence
which might contain the escape sequence as part of its normal data
transmission.
S12 contains the pause interval in 0.02 second increments. The factory
setting is 50, equivalent to 1 second (50 x 0.02 sec). When S12 is 0,
timing is not a factor.
The timing between the 3 escape characters must be less than the pause
interval or the escape sequence will not be detected. The data rate also
affects the timing and must be taken into account when changing the
pause interval.
To disable the escape command, set S2 to a value greater than 127
instead of changing S12. Values between 15 and 255 may be used for
S12.

10-6 Modem 3600


Status Registers

S13
Not used

Bit Mapped S14


Note
In the tables for bit mapped S-registers, bold text indicates
bit value defaults.

Note
When bit-mapped S-registers have parallel AT commands,
the commands are listed in the register tables as a cross
reference. If a command does not exist for the option, the
column is left blank.
Bit Value Command Description
0 -- -- Reserved
1 0 E Local character echo off
1 E1 Local character echo on
2 0 Q Response messages on
1 Q1 Response messages off
3 0 V Response messages as digit codes
1 V1 Response messages as words
4 0 Ignore
1 Q2 Response messages in originate mode
only
5 0 T Tone dial
1 P Pulse dial
6 0 H2 Allow cleardown
1 H3 Disallow cleardown
7 0 *OR1 Forced answer
1 *OR Normal originate

S15
Reserved

Modem 3600 10-7


Status Registers

System Tests S16


This register contains the status of system test options.
Bit Value Command Description
0 0 -- Analog loopback inactive
1 Analog loopback in progress
1 -- -- Reserved
2 0 -- Digital loopback inactive
1 Digital loopback in progress
3 0 -- Remote digital loopback requested by
other modem inactive
1 Remote digital loopback requested by
other modem in progress
4 0 -- Remote digital loopback inactive
1 Remote digital loopback in progress
5 0 -- Self test remote digital loopback inactive
1 Self test remote digital loopback in
progress
6 0 -- Self test analog loopback inactive
1 Self test analog loopback in progress
7 -- -- Reserved

S17
Not used

Test Timeout S18


Test timeout is the amount of time, in 1 second increments, that a
diagnostic test will run and is determined by the value assigned to S18
(0-255). A value of 0 disables the timer allowing a test to run
indefinitely. The default value is 0.

S19, 20
Not used

10-8 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Bit Mapped S21


Comman
Bit Value d Description
6, 0 00 &S DSR forced on
10 &S1 DSR on when online
01 &S2 DSR off 5 seconds after disconnect
11 &S3 DSR follows off hook (OH)
5, 1 00 &C DCD always on
10 &C1 DCD on while carrier present
01 &C2 DCD on except for 5 seconds after
disconnect
11 &C3 DCD follows RTS on remote modem; not
valid in reliable mode
2 0 &R CTS follows RTS by S26 delay
1 &R1 CTS always on
4, 3 00 &D Modem ignores DTR
01 &D1 Modem assumes command mode when
DTR turns off
10 &D2 Modem hangs up when DTR turns off
11 &D3 Modem resets when DTR turns off
7 0 Y Long space disconnect disabled
1 Y1 Long space disconnect enabled

Modem 3600 10-9


Status Registers

Bit Mapped S22


Bit Value Command Description
1, 0 00 L Speaker volume low
01 L1 Speaker volume low
10 L2 Speaker volume low
11 L3 Speaker volume high
3, 2 00 M Speaker off
01 M1 Speaker on until carrier detect
10 M2 Speaker always on
11 M3 Speaker off when modem is dialing
6-4 000 X CONNECT message only, blind dials, no
busy detect
001 X1 CONNECT / appropriate code for rate,
blind dials, no busy detect
010 X2 CONNECT / appropriate code for rate,
waits for dial tone, no busy detect
011 X3 CONNECT / appropriate code for rate,
blind dials, reports BUSY
100 X4 CONNECT / appropriate code for rate,
waits for dial tone, reports BUSY
7 0 &P Make / break ratio (US) 39/61
1 &P1 Make / break ratio (UK) 33/67

Bit Mapped S23


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 &T5 Remote digital loop request denied
1 &T4 Remote digital loop request granted
5-1 --- --- Reserved
7, 6 00 &G No guard tones
01 &G1 550 Hz guard tone
10 &G2 1800 Hz guard tone
11 -- Not used

S24
Not used

10-10 Modem 3600


Status Registers

DTR State Recognition S25


The S25 register specifies the amount of time (0-255) in 0.01 second
(10 ms) increments that DTR must stay high or low in order to be
recognized as such. The default value is 5 (0.05 second).

RTS/CTS Delay S26


The S26 register specifies the amount of time (0-255) in 0.01 second
(10 ms) increments between the RTS signal and the CTS signal. The
default value is 0.

Bit Mapped S27


Bit Value Command Description
1, 0 00 &M Async
01 &M1 Sync data / async dial
10 &M2 Sync data / dial through DTR
11 &M3 Sync data / manual dial
2 0 &L Dial-up line
1 &L1 and Leased line
&L2
3 -- -- Reserved
5, 4 00 &X Internal clock
01 &X1 External clock
10 &X2 Receive clock
11 -- Not used
6 1 -- Enable async DTR dialer
0 Disable async DTR dialer
7 -- -- Reserved

Lookback Timer S28


The S28 register specifies the amount of time in 1.0 minute increments
that the modem will remain in dial backup mode before retrying leased
line mode. A zero will disable automatic lookback to leased line. The
default value is 15 minutes.
Bit Value Command Description
7- 0 0-255 -- Time in 1 minute increments (0=disabled)

Modem 3600 10-11


Status Registers

Bit Mapped S29


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 *NT1 Enable AT command set
1 *NT Disable AT command set
1 0 *RO Options retained at disconnect
1 *RO1 Options restored at disconnect
2 0 *FT Disable V.32 fast train
1 *FT1 Enable V.32 fast train
6, 3 -- -- Reserved
7 0 *FB DTE fallback disabled
1 *FB1 DTE fallback enabled

Bit Mapped S30


Bit Value Command Description
0 -- -- Reserved
1 0 -- V.25 ASCII
1 V.25 EBCDIC
2 0 -- V.25 VAL enabled
1 V.25 VAL disabled
4, 3 -- -- Reserved
5 0 -- NRZ V.25
1 NRZI V.25
7, 6 00 &M V.25 disabled
01 &M4 V.25 bisync enabled
10 &M5 V.25 SDLC enabled
11 &M6 V.25 Async enabled

S31
Reserved

10-12 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Bit Mapped S32


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 &L1 2-wire (leased line only)
1 &L2 4-wire (leased line only)
1 0 *LC1 Line current disconnect = short
1 *LC2 Line current disconnect = long
2 0 *LC Line current disconnect = disable
1 *LC1 or Line current disconnect = enable
*LC2
3 0 *DB Dial backup = manual
1 *DB1 Dial backup = automatic
7-4 -- -- Reserved

S33
Reserved

Bit Mapped S34


Bit Value Command Description
0 -- -- Reserved
1 0 *DG Bilateral digital = disable
1 *DG1 Bilateral digital = enable
2 0 *LA DTE commanded LAL = disable
1 *LA1 DTE commanded LAL = enable
3 0 *RD DTE commanded RDL = disable
1 *RD1 DTE commanded RDL = enable
7-4 -- -- Reserved

DTR / Dial Backup Number to Dial S35


Select the number to automatically dial (1-9 of stored numbers) for the
modem to dial in DTR dialing or autodial backup.

S36-S40
Reserved

Remote Configuration Escape Character S41


Select the remote configuration escape character (1-255). The default is
ASCII 61 (=).

Modem 3600 10-13


Status Registers

Remote Configuration Guard Time S42


Select the remote configuration guard time (0-255) in 20 ms intervals.
The default is 50 (1 sec).

S43
Reserved

XON Character from DTE S44


Select the XON character (0-127) to be sent from the DTE. The default
value is ASCII 17.

XOFF Character from DTE S45


Select the XOFF character (0-127) to be sent from the DTE. The default
value is ASCII 19.

S46-48
Reserved

XON Character to DTE S49


Select the XON character (0-127) to be sent to the DTE. The default
value is ASCII 17.

XOFF Character to DTE S50


Select the XOFF character (0-127) to be sent to the DTE. The default
value is ASCII 19.

Dial Line Transmit Level S51


The S51 register selects dial line transmit level from -9 to -30 dBm in 1
dBm increments. The default value is 10.
Bit Value Command Description
4-0 0 to 30 *TDn (n=9 Transmit level in dBm (-9 through -30
to 30) dBm)
7-5 -- -- Reserved

10-14 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Leased Line Transmit Level S52


The S52 register selects leased line transmit level from 0 to -30 dBm in
1 dBm increments. The default value is 0.
Bit Value Command Description
4-0 0 to 30 *TLn (n=0- Transmit level in dBm (0 through -30
30) dBm)
7-5 -- -- Reserved

Automatic Rate Adaption Threshold S53


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 -- Disable rate renegotiation above initial
connect
1 Enable rate renegotiation above initial
connect
1 -- -- Reserved
3, 2 00 %R Automatic rate adaption threshold
disabled
01 %R1 Low BER
10 %R2 Medium BER
11 %R3 High BER
4 -- -- Reserved
5 0 Protocol negotiation status disabled
1 Protocol negotiation status enabled
6 -- -- Reserved
7 0 *DR Disable distinctive ring detection
1 *DR=1 Enable distinctive ring detection

Modem 3600 10-15


Status Registers

Flow Control S54


The S54 register selects the flow control options.
Bit Value Command Description
1, 0 00 \Q Disable DTE flow control
01 \Q1 Enable DTE XON/XOFF flow control
10 \Q2 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE
11 \Q3 Enable bilateral CTS/RTS flow control
2 -- -- Reserved
3 0 \G Disable modem port flow control
1 \G1 Enable modem port XON/XOFF flow
control
4 0 \X No XON/XOFF characters to remote
1 \X1 Pass XON/XOFF characters to remote
6, 5 00 \Q4 Disable flow control from DCE
01 \Q5 Enable XON/XOFF flow control
10 \Q6 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE
11 \Q7 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE
7 -- -- Reserved

S55
Reserved

10-16 Modem 3600


Status Registers

V.42 Compression Control S56


Bit Value Command Description
1, 0 00 %C Compression disabled
01 %C2 Compression enabled on transmit data
only
10 %C3 Compression enabled on receive data
only
11 %C1 Compression enabled on transmit and
receive data
7-2 -- -- Reserved

Bit Mapped S57


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 *RC Standard number codes
15 - 4800 bps
18 - 9600 bps
1 *RC1 Alternate number codes
11 - 4800 bps
12 - 9600 bps
4-1 -- -- Reserved
5 0 Busy out disabled
1 Busy out enabled during LAL test mode
(for private PBX use only)
7, 6 -- -- Reserved

Inactivity Timer S58


The S58 register specifies the number of minutes the modem waits
before terminating a call when no data is sent or received. This register
is active when in error control mode. 0 disables timer. Issue the \Tn
command to load inactivity timer, n=0-255 minutes.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0 \T Disable
1-255 \Tn (n=1- Timer value in minutes
255)

Modem 3600 10-17


Status Registers

Break Control S59


The S59 register determines the action taken when a break is
encountered. Refer to the “Break Control \Kn” section on page6-9 for
further information.
Bit Value Command Description
2-0 000 \K Break option 0
001 \K1 Break option 1
010 \K2 Break option 2
011 \K3 Break option 3
100 \K4 Break option 4
101 \K5 Break option 5
7-3 -- -- Reserved

10-18 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Bit Mapped S60


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 %E Disable auto retrain
1 %E1 Enable auto retrain
1 0 MNP compression disabled
1 MNP compression enabled
2 0 \C Disable auto-reliable data buffer
1 \C1 Buffer data for 4 seconds or 200
characters
5- 3 -- -- Reserved
6 0 \R RI blinks for ring and remains on for
duration of call
1 \R1 RI blinks for ring and turns off when
call is answered
7 0 \V Disable protocol response messages
1 \V1 Enable protocol response messages

DTE Options S61


The S61 register indicates the character size and parity. This register is
for reference only.
Bit Value Command Description
2-0 -- -- Reserved
3 0 -- 7 bit word length
1 8 bit word length
5, 4 00 -- Mark parity
01 No parity
10 Odd parity
11 Even parity
7, 6 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-19


Status Registers

Disconnect Buffer Delay S62


The S62 register determines the delay before disconnect, to allow buff-
ers to empty, when disconnect conditions exist.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0 %D Buffer disabled
1-255 %Dn Disconnect buffer delay value (seconds)

Maximum Transmit Block Size S63


The S63 register sets the maximum transmit block size.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 63 \A Maximum block size = 64
127 \A1 Maximum block size = 128
191 \A2 Maximum block size = 192
255 \A3 Maximum block size = 256

Auto-Reliable Fallback Character S64


The S64 register stores the selected ASCII value of the auto-reliable
fallback character.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0 %A Disable auto-reliable fallback
character
1-127 %An ASCII value 1-127

S65-66
Reserved

10-20 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Link Speed Status S67


The S67 register indicates the true data link (DCE) speed. This register
is for reference only.
Bit Value Command Description
4-0 00000 -- N/A
00001 300 bps
00010 Reserved
00011 1200 bps
00100 2400 bps
00101 4800 bps
00110 7200 bps
00111 9600 bps uncoded
01000 9600 bps trellis
01001 12000 bps
01010 14400 bps
01011 16800 bps
01100 19200 bps
01101 21600 bps
01110 24000 bps
01111 26400 bps
10000 28800 bps
10001 31200 bps
10010 33600 bps
7-5 -- -- Reserved

S68
Reserved

Modem 3600 10-21


Status Registers

DCE Independent Speed S69


The S69 register selects the DCE independent rate operation. When
S69 is 0, DTE and DCE rates are equal and the maximum originate
connect rate up to 14,400 bps is determined by S80. When S69 is
non-zero, the maximum originate connect rate is determined by S69.
Bit Value Command Description
4-0 00000 %B Use rate indicated by S80
00001 %B1 300 bps
00011 %B2 1200 bps
00100 %B3 2400 bps
00101 %B4 4800 bps
00111 %B5 9600 bps uncoded
01000 %B6 9600 bps trellis
00110 %B7 7200 bps
01001 %B8 12,000 bps
01010 %B9 14,400 bps
00010 %B10 Reserved
01011 %B11 16,800 bps
01100 %B12 19,200 bps
01101 %B13 21,600 bps
01110 %B14 24,000 bps
01111 %B15 26,400 bps
10000 %B16 28,800 bps
10001 %B17 31,200 bps
10010 %B18 33,600 bps
7-5 -- -- Reserved

10-22 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Operating Mode S70


The S70 register determines the protocol operating mode and action
taken on an MNP link attempt failure. LAPM is assigned highest
priority.
Example: With \N7 selected the modem tries an LAPM connection
first; if unsuccessful the modem tries an MNP connection; if also
unsuccessful, the modem connects in normal mode. Modes allowing
protocol fallback are referred to as auto-reliable.
Bit Value Command Description
2-0 000 \N Normal
001 \N1 Direct
010 \N2 MNP only (reliable)
011 \N3 MNP or normal (auto-reliable)
100 \N4 LAPM only (reliable)
101 \N5 LAPM or normal (auto-reliable)
110 \N6 LAPM or MNP only (auto-reliable)
111 \N7 LAPM or MNP or native (auto-
reliable)
3 0 \M Disable V.42 fast detect
1 \M1 Enable V.42 fast detect
7-4 -- -- Reserved

Operating Mode Status S71


The S71 register indicates the level of error controlling protocol. This
register is for reference only.
Bit Value Command Description
2-0 000 -- Protocol not active
001 Protocol negotiation in progress
010 MNP level 2 active
011 MNP level 3 active
100 MNP level 4 active
101 MNP level 5 active
110 LAPM active
111 LAPM with data compression active
7-3 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-23


Status Registers

Bit Mapped S72


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 \J Disable slaved DTE/DCE (constant
speed DTE on)
1 \J1 Disable slaved DTE/DCE (constant speed
DTE on)
2, 1 -- -- Reserved
3 0 &R9 CTS does not follow DCD
1 &R2 CTS follows DCD
6-4 -- -- Reserved
7 0 -- Disable autocallback
1 Enable autocallback

Password Timeout S73


S73 sets the length of time the remote user has to enter a password
before the secure Modem 3600 drops the call. The default is 0.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds (0 = disable)

Callback Delay S74


The length of time the secure modem waits to place the callback call
after the remote user correctly enters a password and the call is dropped.
The default is 15 seconds.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds (0 = disable)

Callback Retry S75


The number of times the modem will attempt to place the callback call
to a remote user if the first attempt is unsuccessful. The default is 0.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0-255 -- Number of attempts to place the call

10-24 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Callback Retry Delay S76


The length of time that the modem waits, after an unsuccessful attempt
to connect to the remote unit at the programmed callback number,
before trying to place the call again. The default is 15 seconds.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds (0 = disable)

Lockout Threshold S77


Set the number of incorrect remote user password attempts that can be
made before the call is dropped. The default is 0. When remote
configuration is active, the lockout occurs after seven attempts.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0-255 -- Number of incorrect password attempts
(0 = disable)

Autocallback Timer S78


The S78 register specifies the time in seconds that the modem waits
before initiating autocallback. The default is 30 seconds.
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds before autocallback

Break Length S79


The S79 register sets the length of the break sent to the DTE when a
break signal is received. The range is from 1-255 in 20 ms increments.
The default is 35 (700 ms).
Bit Value Command Description
7-0 0-255 \B Send break
\Bn Set break length (n=1-255)

Modem 3600 10-25


Status Registers

Serial Port or DTE Speed S80


The S80 register indicates the serial port speed.
Bit Value Command Description
4-0 00001 -- 300 bps
00010 600 bps
00011 1200 bps
00100 2400 bps
00101 4800 bps
00110 7200 bps
00111 9600 bps
01000 12,000 bps
01001 14,400 bps
01010 16,800 bps
01011 19,200 bps
01100 21,600 bps
01101 24,000 bps
01110 26,400 bps
01111 28,800 bps
10000 31,200 bps
10001 33,600 bps
10010 38,400 bps
10011 57,600 bps
10100 11,5200 bps

10-26 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Minimum DCE Speed S81


Bit Value Command Description
4-0 00000 %L Disabled
00001 %L1 Disabled
00011 %L2 1200 bps
00100 %L3 2400 bps
00101 %L4 4800 bps
00111 %L5 9600 bps uncoded
01000 %L6 9600 bps trellis
00110 %L7 7200 bps
01001 %L8 12,000 bps
01010 %L9 14,400 bps
00010 %L10 600 bps
01011 %L11 16,800 bps
01100 %L12 19,200 bps
01101 %L13 21,600 bps
01110 %L14 24,000 bps
01111 %L15 26,400 bps
10000 %L16 28,800 bps
10001 %L17 31,200 bps
10010 %L18 33,600 bps
7-3 -- -- Reserved

Negotiation Status S82


Bit Value Command Description
1-0 -- -- Reserved
3-2 00 W Disable negotiation status
01 W1 Enable negotiation status
10 W2 No negotiation status; indicates DCE link
rates
7-4 -- -- Reserved

S83
Reserved

Modem 3600 10-27


Status Registers

Bit Mapped S84


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 -- Enable any key abort
1 Disable any key abort
7-1 -- -- Reserved

S85-S87
Reserved

Modulation Type S88


Bit Value Command Description
3-0 0000 -- Auto mode
0001 V.21
0010 B103
0011 Reserved
0100 B212A
0101 V.22 bis
0110 V.27 (lease line only)
0111 Reserved
1000 V.29 (lease line only)
1001 Reserved
1010 V.33 (lease line only)
1011 V.32 bis
1100 V.34
7-4 Reserved

S89-S90
Reserved

10-28 Modem 3600


Status Registers

Current Modulation S91


The S91 register is for reference only.
Bit Value Command Description
3-0 0000 -- Auto mode
0001 V.21
0010 B103
0011 Reserved
0100 B212A
0101 V.22 bis
0110 V.27 (lease line only)
0111 Reserved
1000 V.29 (lease line only)
1001 Reserved
1010 V.33 (lease line only)
1011 V.32 bis
1100 V.34
7-4 -- -- Reserved

S92 - S94
Reserved

Modem 3600 10-29


Status Registers

V.34 Settings S95


Bit Value Command Description
0 0 -- Disable V.8 for non-V.34 answer
1 Enable V.8 for non-V.34 answer
3-1 -- -- Reserved
4 0 -- Disable non-linear encoding
1 Enable non-linear encoding
5 0 -- Disable pre-emphasis
1 Enable pre-emphasis
6 0 -- Disable constellation shaping
1 Enable constellation shaping
7 0 -- Precoding disabled
1 Precoding enabled

V.34 Asymmetric Settings S96


Bit Value Command Description
4-0 -- -- Reserved
5 0 -- Disable asymmetric bit rates
1 Enable asymmetric bit rates
6 -- -- Reserved
7 0 -- Disable TX power control
1 Enable TX power control

Bit Mapped S97


Bit Value Command Description
1-0 00 *TH V.34 rate threshold low (10- 6 BER)
01 *TH1 Medium V.34 threshold (10- 4 BER)
10 *TH2 High V.34 threshold (10- 2 BER)
7-2 -- -- Reserved

S98- S100
Reserved

10-30 Modem 3600


Chapter 11
V.25 bis Autodialer

V.25 bis is an option that allows dialing functions to be controlled using


synchronous data.
Select V.25 bis through the appropriate &M command in the AT
command set (refer to the “Asynchronous / Synchronous Mode
Selection &M” section on pa ge5-25).
If using the LCD,
1) Scroll through the menu to Main Menu 5, MODIFY
CONFIGURATION.
2) Advance to and enter the DTE PARAMETERS submenu.
3) Select SYNC DATA.
4) Advance to DIAL METHOD.
5) Select one of V.25 BISYNC DIALER, V.25 SDLC DIALER,
or V.25 ASYNC DIALER, and then select either ASCII or
EBCDIC character format.
Note
The modem must be configured asV.25 SDLC ASCII NRZ for
use with an AS400 IBM computer.

Modem 3600 11-1


V.25 bis Autodialer

Autodialer Command Strings and Parameters


Most command strings for the autodialer include two parts: the
command itself and the parameters that follow. For the purposes of this
chapter, parameters can be telephone numbers or anything appropriate
to V.25 bis as described in the following text. Parameters are separated
by semicolons.
For example:
PRN a; nnn . . . n

where a= the phone number address in memory and nnn...n= the


phone number. The a and the nnn...n are both parameters. Not all
commands have parameters. For example the CIC command has no
parameter.

Software Guidelines
• An indicator enclosed in less than/greater than signs represents a
specific character in the appropriate character set, ASCII or
EBCDIC.
<sp> - space

• Each response below is considered an individual message by V.25


bis conventions. For example, a dial command with intermediate
call progress enabled (BISYNC mode ASCII/EBCDIC character
set) is:
From computer To computer
<sy><sy><stx>CRN<sp>(205)555-0124<etx> <sy><sy><stx>VAL<etb>
• V.25 bis commands can be in one of these data formats:
ASYNC
BISYNC
SDLC NRZ
SDLC NRZI
in ASCII or EBCDIC
Access these formats using:
&MAsynchronous dial/asynchronous data
&M1Asynchronous dial/synchronous data
&M2Dials stored number when DTR off/on transition is detected/sync data

11-2 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

&M3Manual dial/sync data


&M4V.25 bis dialer/BISYNC protocol/sync data (ASCII)
&M5V.25 bis dialer/SDLC protocol/sync data (NRZ)
&M6V.25 bis async dial/sync data
&M7V.25 bis async dial/async data
&M8V.25 bis dialer w/BISYNC protocol/sync data (EBCDIC)
&M9V.25 bis dialer w/SDLC protocol/sync data (EBCDIC) (NRZ)
&M10V.25 bis dialer w/SDLC protocol/sync data (ASCII) (NRZI)
&M11V.25 bis dialer w/SDLC protocol/sync data (EBCDIC) (NRZI)
• Separator fields depend on the data format.
for ASYNC {sep} = command <CR>
BISYNC {sep} = <sy><sy><stx> command <etx>
SDLC {sep} = <Flags><Addr><ctl> command
<FCS> where:
<sy> = 16 hexadecimal
<stx> = 02 hex
<etx> = 03 hex
<etb> = 17 hex
<Flag> = 7E hex
<Addr> = FF hex
<ctl> = 13 hex (last frame), 03 hex (not last frame)
<FCS> = Frame Check Sequence
<CR> = Carriage Return

Invalid Responses
Except when stated otherwise, the following explanations for invalid
INV responses apply:
INVCUAny transmission error (parity, framing, etc.).
INVMSThis message has one of three possible meanings:
1) Receiving too many characters for any command.
2) Any command followed by a semicolon ;
INVPSThis message has one of three possible meanings:
1) Any parameter set ending with a semicolon ;
2) Any parameter set containing too many or not enough
parameters; this includes
- any command entered without parameters that
requires parameters
- any command entered with parameters that
does not require parameters.

Modem 3600 11-3


V.25 bis Autodialer

3) Any parameter containing too many characters.


INVPVThis message has one of three possible meanings:
1) Any parameter set containing invalid characters
2) Any parameter or parameter set containing no valid (only
ignored) characters
3) Any parameter set containing an out-of-range parameter

Dial Parameters
Table 11-1 lists and describes the parameters used in autodialing. The
memory available for dialing can hold up to 40 characters. Parameters
inserted for readability are not counted.
Parameters Function
0 thru 9 DTMF and pulse digit
* and # DTMF digit
W Wait for 2nd type of dial tone
> Pause for 1 second
= Pause for 3 seconds
< Pause for programmed delay time
P Pulse dialing
T Tone dialing
& Flash (go on hook) for ½ second
; PARM separator
Space, dash, Parameters inserted for readability
parenthesis, period

V.25 bis Commands and Responses


The following sections describe the commands used with the V.25 bis
autodialer and explain the responses received when each command is
executed.

11-4 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

Dial Command CRN nn...n


The dial command is a CRN followed by the number to be dialed
nn...n. The modem accepts up to 40 dial parameters, excluding the
CRN command and any leading spaces.
Responses:
VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-
free command with no transmission error such as a parity error.
This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example: TRN (205)-555-0124
INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.
Examples: CRN;(205)-555-0124
CRN; (semicolon invalid)
INVPSInvalid command - parameter syntax error.
Examples: CRN (205)-555-0124
CRN (205)-555;0124
CRN
INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error.
Examples: CRN (205)-555-012Q
CRN
CFIETCall failure - reorder or busy.
CFIRT Call failure - timeout occurred.
CFINTCall failure - no answer back tone.
CFIDTCall failure - no dial tone.
CFIAB Call failure - ABT detected but no carrier.
INCIncoming ring detected.

Program Number Command PRN a;nn...n


The program number command is PRN followed by the one digit decimal
address a and the number to be stored nn . . . n. Each address can
store up to 31 dial parameters. Ignored characters in the dial number are
not stored. Nine stored numbers are available at addresses 1-9.
Responses:
Same as for the CRN command except for call progress responses.

Modem 3600 11-5


V.25 bis Autodialer

Intermediate Call Progress Response


The following response is given only if enabled. See Option Definition
002 below.
CNX@nnnnnBPS
where nnnnn is the line speed. This connect response appears after
handshake completed, but before DSR is activated. This response is
required if the intermediate call progress option is enabled.

Dial Stored Number CRS a


The command for dialing a stored number is CRS followed by the one
digit address a for the stored number to be dialed.
Responses:
Same as for the CRN command plus
CFINSCall failure - number not stored.
If the number is linked with other numbers via a PRL command, failure
responses are returned as
{sep}a;{call progress messages} . . .
where a is the address dialed, followed by the separator field and call
progress messages (CFI, etc.).
If the call fails to connect and the number is linked with other numbers,
the autodialer tries to call the next number in the list of linked numbers.

11-6 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

Request List of Stored Numbers RLN


The request list of stored numbers command is an RLN.
Responses:
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example:TLN
INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.
Example:RLN;
If no number is stored at the specified address nothing is returned for
that address. The separator {sep} is a
<etb><sy><sy><stx>LSN<sp>
sequence for BISYNC format (the last LSN string terminates with
<etx> per V.25 bis). For synchronous bit-oriented operation, each LSN
string is treated as an individual message per V.25 bis.
All stored numbers are sent to the DTE as
LSNa;nn...n{sep}a;nn...n...
where a is the stored number address and nn....n is the number stored.

Disregard Incoming Call DIC


The command for disregarding an incoming call does not require
parameters. If no call is incoming, the command is ignored.
Responses:
VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-
free command with no transmission error such as a parity
error. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example:TIC
INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error.
Example:SIC;

Modem 3600 11-7


V.25 bis Autodialer

Connect Incoming Call CIC


No parameters are required. If there is an incoming call, the modem
immediately answers the call. If no call is incoming, the command is
ignored.
Responses:
Same as for the DIC commandI

Redial Last Number CRR n


The CRR n command redials the last number a maximum of n times. If
no parameters are present, the modem redials once. Also, the maximum
number of redials, the amount of time between redials, and other
parameters may vary depending on application and national
requirements if outside the U. S.
Responses:
Same as for the CRS command.
Failure response is
{sep}r;{call progress messages}...
where r is the recall count (1 ≤ r ≤ n; 1,2...,etc.), followed by a
separator field and call progress messages (CFI XX, etc.). If the call
fails to connect, this is repeated for the specified number of times.

Link Number by Address PRL a;b


This command links the number at address a with the number at address
b. The addresses are one digit decimal values. Linking numbers enables
different numbers to be dialed if a call failure occurs.
Only forward linking to one other number is allowed, so address 1 can
be linked to 4 to 8 to 9 etc.; however (using this example), if address 4 is
dialed by a CRS command without connection it links forward to 8 then
to 9.
If all these fail to connect, the autodialer will not back-link to address 1
unless circular linking is used. Numbers may be linked as 4 to 5 to 3;
however, if address 3 is dialed, back-linking to 5 is not allowed.

11-8 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

If circular linking (1 to 8 to 7 to 1) is used, dialing is discontinued after


the addressed number in the dial command has been dialed twice. If
only one parameter follows the PRL command, the number at address a
is unlinked from its forward link.
For example, if the link list 4 to 8 to 3 to 7 to 9 to 1 exists andPRL 7 is
received, 7 would be unlinked from 9, but not from 3. This would result
in two link lists: 4 to 8 to 3 to 7 and 9 to 1.
Responses:
VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-
free command with no transmission error such as a parity
error. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example:TRL 1;5
INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.
Examples:PRL;1;5
PRL;
INVPS Invalid command - parameter syntax error.
Examples:PRL 1;5;
PRL 1;0;0
PRL 1;
PRL
PRL 001;5
INVPVInvalid command - parameter value error.
Examples:PRL 1;Q
PRL Q;1
PRL 1;45 where addresses 01-09 are defined
CFILDCall failure - no connection from link list.

Request List of Linked Numbers RLL


The request list of linked numbers command is an RLL with no
parameters.
Responses:
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example:TLL

Modem 3600 11-9


V.25 bis Autodialer

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.


Example:RLL;
LSLList linked numbers.
In all LSL examples, if no number is stored at the specified address no
response is sent. The separator field for BISYNC is an
<etb><sp><sp><stx>LSL<sp>
The last LSL string ends with <etx> per V.25 bis. For synchronous bit
oriented operation, each LSL string is treated as an individual message
per V.25 bis. All linked numbers are sent to the DTE as
LSLa;l{sep}a;l
where a = stored address and l = link address.

Request List of Version RLV


The request list of version information command is an RLV with no
parameters.
Responses:
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example:TLV
INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.
Example: RLV;
LSVList version
The version information is sent to the DTE as
LSV<sp>Sbbbbbbb00sccppddr /
comment field
where bbbbbbb is the board number, s is the series number, cc is the
controller code revision, pp is the data pump code revision, dd is the
board dash number, and r is the printed circuit board revision followed
by a comment field.

MODEM OPTIONS COMMAND PRO xxx;yy;0;0...


The program options command is PRO followed by the starting register
address (1 to 3 decimal digits), option count (1 or 2 decimal digits) and
the data for each option (1 to 3 decimal digits per option). The
“Options” section on pa ge11-14 lists all available options with
definitions, possible settings, and default values.

11-10 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

The modem must be able to accept 40 non-ignored characters besides


the PRO command (leading zeros and semicolons are not considered
ignored characters).
Responses:
VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-
free command with no transmission error such as a parity
error. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example: TRO 0;1;1
INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error.
Examples:PRO;0;1;1
PRO;
INVPSInvalid command - parameter syntax error.
Examples:PRO 0;1;0;
PRO 0;1;1;1
PRO
PRO 0;001;1
INVPVInvalid command - parameter value error.
Examples:PRO 0;1;Q
PRO Q;1;1
PRO 0;0;0
PRO 68;1;0
when option 68 is undefined for the modem.
INVPV<sp>xxxInvalid command - parameter value error.
Example: PRO 10;5;0;0;0;2;1
This invalid message can be returned when a block of options is being
changed. The conditions for this invalid response are as follows:
• An undefined option number is specified. In the above example, if
option 12 is undefined for a certain modem (and no other error
conditions apply) options 10 and 11 would be changed as
specified in the command message. The next option to be changed
would be option 12. The modem would detect that this is an
undefined option, stop execution of the command, and return an
INVPV012 message. Options 10 and 11 would still be changed as
commanded; options 13 and 14 would be unchanged.

Modem 3600 11-11


V.25 bis Autodialer

• An out-of-range value for a particular option is specified In the


above example, if the fourth value in the option string is
undefined or out-of-range for option 13 in a certain modem (and
no other error conditions apply), options 10 through 12 would be
changed as specified in the command message. The next option to
be changed would be option 13. The modem would then detect
that the value is undefined or out-of-range for that option, stop
execution of the command, and return an INVPV013 message
Options 10 through 12 would still be changed as commanded;
options 13 and 14 would be unchanged.

Save Current Settings PRK


PRK saves the current option settings.
Responses:
VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-
free command with no transmission error such as a parity
error. Confirmation is sent before the command is executed.
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example: TRK
INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.
Examples:PRK;0
PRK Q

Restore Factory Settings PRP n


PRP n restores current option settings to factory option set n where n is
a 1 digit decimal number.
Note
Restoring a factory option set other than factory option 9
disables the V.25 synchronous dialer.
If no parameter follows the command, the modem automatically selects
factory option set 1.
Responses:
VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-
free command with no transmission error such as a parity
error. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.

11-12 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.


Example:TRP
INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.
Examples:PRP;1
PRP Q
INVPS Invalid command - parameter syntax error.
Examples:PRP 1;
PRP 1;1
PRP 001
INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error.
Example:PRP 5
where factory default 5 is not defined for the modem. Current modem
factory options are 1-9.

Request List of Stored Options RLO xxx; yy


The request list of stored options command is RLO followed by an
optional 1 to 3 digit decimal address and a 1 or 2 digit decimal count.
The “Options” section on page 11-14 lists all available options with
definitions, possible settings, and default values.
Responses:
INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.
Example:TLO 0;1
INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error.
Examples:RLO;0;1
RLO Q;1
INVPSInvalid command - parameter syntax error.
Examples:RLO 0;1;
RLO 0;1;4
RLO 0;001
INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error.
Examples:RLO 0;Q
RLO 0;0
RLO999;45
LSOList stored options.

Modem 3600 11-13


V.25 bis Autodialer

The separator {sep} for BISYNC is an


<etb><sp><sp><stx>LSO<sp>
sequence for the sync format (the last LSO string terminates with <etx>
per V.25 bis). For synchronous bit oriented operation, each LSO string
is treated as an individual message per V.25 bis.
If no parameters follow, all stored options are sent to the DTE as
LSOxxx;ooo{sep}xxx;ooo...
Each value must be padded with leading zeros so that each field has
three characters. Option zero would be sent as
LSO000;000
If only an address follows the command, the single requested option is
sent to the DTE as
LSOxxx;ooo
If address and count follow the command, the requested count of
options starting with the specified address are sent to the DTE as
LSOxxx;ooo{sep}xxx;ooo...

Options
You can change the options for the V.25 bis autodialer using the PRO
command or list them using the RLO command. Options are listed in
Table 11-2.

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options


Option Definition Settings Default
002: Intermediate call progress 0 - Disable 0
messages 1 - Enable
003: Blind dial 0 - Disable 0
1 - Enable
007: Long space disconnect 0 - Disable 1
1 - Enable

11-14 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)


Option Definition Settings Default
051: Primary transmit / receive 007: 1200 bps 54
rate 008: 2400 bps (28800
034: 4800 bps bps)
035: 9600 bps
uncoded
036: 9600 bps
046: 7200 bps
047: 12,000
bps
048: 14,400
bps
049: 16,800
bps
050: 19,200
bps
051: 21,600
bps
052: 24,000
bps
053: 26,400
bps
054: 28,800
bps
055: 31,200
bps
056: 33,600
bps
055: Transmit clock 0 - Internal 0
1 - External
2 - Receive
(slave)
063: Autoanswer 0 - Disable 0
1 - Enable
(answer after
1 to 255 rings)

Modem 3600 11-15


V.25 bis Autodialer

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)


Option Definition Settings Default
064: Line current disconnect 0 - Off 2
1 - Short (8
ms)
2 - Long (90
ms)
076: Speaker control 0 - Off 4
1 - On
4 - On until
CD
6 - Off when
dialing
077: Speaker volume 0 - Low 1
1 - Medium
2 - High
085: Constant carrier RTS/CTS 0 to 250 ms 0
delay 10 ms
increments
087: DTR dropout timer 0 to 255 in 10 5 (50 ms)
DTR must turn off for this ms
length of time to be increments
recognized.
089: Pause in dial string 0 - Invalid 2
1 to 255
seconds
090: Carriage return character ASCII or 13 dec
EBCDIC
character
range
091: Line feed character ASCII or 10 dec
EBCDIC ASCII;
character 37 dec
range EBCDIC

11-16 Modem 3600


V.25 bis Autodialer

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)


Option Definition Settings Default
092: Guard tone 0 = None 0
1 = 550 Hz
2 = 1800 Hz
093: Carrier detect delay 0 - Off; 1 to 6
255 (60 ms)
10 ms
increments
094: Loss of carrier disconnect 0 - Off 1 to 14
255 (1.4 sec)
100 ms
increments
095: DTR dial address - Stored 1
telephone number address to
dial on DTR off-to-on
transition
096: DTR dial 0 - Disable 0
1 - Enable
098: Call timeout 0 - Off 30 sec
1-255 sec
103: Signal quality retrain 0 - Disable 1
1 - Send
training
sequence on
poor quality
111: Modulation mode 000: Auto-
mode
001: V.21
002: B103
005: V.22
006: V.22 bis
007: V.27 ter
009: V.29
012: V.32 bis
013: V.34

Modem 3600 11-17


V.25 bis Autodialer

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)


Option Definition Settings Default
112 V.34 Select Threshold 000: Low
001: Medium
002: High
113 V.34 Asymmetric bit rates 000: Disabled
001: Enabled
903: Bilateral loop - If enabled and 0 - Disabled 0
a test is commanded, bilateral 1 - Enabled
loop is defined as follows:
Test Bilateral Commanded
Loop
Loop 1 Loop 2
Loop 2 Loop 1
Loop 3 Loop 4
Loop 4 Loop 3
Loop definitions per CCITT
V.54.
904: Computer commanded 0 - Disable 0
remote digital loopback 1 - Enable
905: Computer commanded local 0 - Disable 0
analog loopback 1 - Enable
906: Remote commanded test 0 - Disable 1
1 - Enable
907: Test timer 0 - Until DTR 0
drops
TTT - 1 to 255
sec

11-18 Modem 3600


Chapter 12
Maintenance

Warning
Disconnect power before performing maintenance.
Although dangerous voltage levels are not exposed,
disconnecting power ensures that no electric shock hazard
is present.

General
The modem contains no internal electronic components that can be
serviced or replaced by the user. Repairs should not be attempted by the
user.

Fuse Replacement
If a fuse fails, replace it with one of equal rating. Repeated failure
indicates a more serious problem.

Maintenance
The modem provides maintenance-free service. Periodically it is advisable
to remove dust that has collected on internal components. If attempting to
clean the modem, remove dust with a soft bristle brush and low pressure
air or vacuum.
Before attempting diagnostic tests, verify that all connectors and plugs are
firmly inserted. The test procedures identify the faulty component in a bad
communications link.

Modem 3600 12-1


Maintenance

Calling Technical Support


The Service and Support page at the back of this User’s Guide contains
several phone and faxback numbers and the Web address. If calling
Technical Support, please call from a location near the computer with
the modem. It helps expedite the call to have the following information
available:
• Type of modem -- Modem 3600
• Modem serial number
• Date code
• Purchase date
• Type and version of software, including data communications,
fax, and browser/reader software
• Type and version of other software running at the same time

Note
Do not return the modem to the manufacturer without prior
authorization.
If the unit appears faulty, contact Black Box Technical Support at
724-746-5500 (USA) for service and assistance.

12-2 Modem 3600


Appendix A
Specifications

Size
Width7.0 inches (17.78 cm)
Depth10.5 inches (26.67 cm)
Height2.25 inches (5.72 cm)
Weight2 lbs. 13 oz. (1.28 kg)
Front Panel32 ASCII character LCD

Environmental Conditions
Temperature:
Operation +32° F to +122° F
(0° C to +50° C)
Storage -40° F to +158° F
(-40° C to +70° C)
Humidity:0 to 95% relative humidity, noncondensing

Power Requirements
Voltage:115 Vac ±10%; 50-60 Hz,
or
12 to 60 Vdc
Power consumption: 14 watts

Telephone Line
Balanced 600 ohm type 3002 or equivalent 16 dB nominal loss, frequency
translation up to ±10 Hz

Digital Interface
Conforms to EIA-232D and CCITT V.24

V.3600 A-1
Specifications

Modem Data Rates


300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200,
21600, 24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps.

Fax Rates
14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, and 2400

Modulations
V.34, V.32, V.22, V.21, V.27 bis, V.29, Bell 103, Bell 1200, V.17, V.33,
V.22 bis, V.32 bis

Fax Modulation
Modulation Speed
V.21 channel 2300 bps
V.27 ter 2400 bps
V.27 ter 4800 bps
V.297200 bps
V.177200 bps
V.177200 bps with short train
V.299600 bps
V.179600 bps
V.179600 bps with short train
V.1712000 bps
V.1712000 bps with short train
V.1714400 bps
V.1714400 bps with short train

Internal Transmit Clock Frequency


Selected bit rate ± 0.01%

External Transmit Clock Frequency


Selected bit rate ± 0.01%

Transmit Output Level


0 to -30 dBm, selectable.

Operation
4-wire, full-duplex, leased (private) line
2-wire, full-duplex, leased (private) line or PSTN

A-2 V.3600
Specifications

Carrier Detect Level


Dynamic to -43 dBm

Telco Connection
8-pin modular jack, dial and private lines

Testing
511 PN pattern (per V.52) V.54 remote loopback control

Line Equalization
Automatic adaptive

RTS/CTS Delay
From 0 ± 2 ms to 90 ± 2 ms, user selectable in 10 ms increments
(The default is 0 ms.)

Link Layer Protocols


V.42/V.42 bis error correction and compression protocol
MNP levels 2-5 error correction and compression protocol

V.3600 A-3
Appendix B
Phone Jack Descriptions

DIAL Pin Functions


The DIAL jack connects to the PSTN dial-up lines. Pin functions are as
follows:
Pin Function
1, 2, 3 Not used
4R Ring side of telephone line
5T Tip side of telephone line
6, 7, 8 Not used

TELSET/LEASED LINE Pin Functions


The 8-pin TELSET/LEASED LINE jack allows a standard telephone or a
leased line to be connected to the modem. Pin functions are as follows:
Pin Function
1, 2 Transmit pair - 4-wire leased line or Tx and Rx for 2-wire
leased line
4, 5 Ring and tip (respectively) of telephone line for a telephone
7, 8 Receive pair - 4-wire leased line

V.3600 B-1
Appendix C
Hardware Options

Jumper Option Selection


Modem configuration is controlled by front panel pushbuttons and the
LCD, AT or V.25 bis commands, and one hardware option jumper located
on the PC board. Normally, jumpers do not have to be changed. If a
change is required, remove the modem cover. The jumper diagrams on the
following pages indicate the factory settings.

Removing the Cover

Warning
Disconnect power before removing the cover. Although
dangerous voltage levels are not exposed, disconnecting
power ensures an electrical shock hazard is not present.
1) Place the unit on its side on a flat surface.
2) To disengage the cover’s locks from the the base of the modem,
insert a medium size flat screwdriver blade in one of the slots as
illustrated in Figure C-1. DO NOT PUSH the screwdriver, but pry
the lock open by applying pressure toward the unit.
3) Assist removal by pushing the cover from the base.
4) Repeat this procedure with the remaining three slots.

Modem 3600 C-1


Hardware Options

Bottom of
the modem

Slots - Open the two slots


on one side of the modem
first. Then open the two on
the other side.

Figure C-1. Cover Removal

C-2 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Figure C-2 shows a typical jumper configuration.

Figure C-2. Jumper Location for Ground Option

Modem 3600 C-3


Hardware Options

Figure C-3 shows a typical jumper configuration.

Figure C-3. Typical Jumper Configuration

Ground Option Jumper


Signal ground is normally connected to chassis ground. If interference
exists, isolate signal ground from chassis ground.

* factory setting

Replacing the Cover


To replace the cover, align the lock clips, rear guide grooves, and front
lock tabs. Press the cover in place until the lock clips engage the lock
prongs.

C-4 Modem 3600


Appendix D
Fault Isolation Procedure

Fault Isolation Procedure


This diagnostic test procedure and the indicator lights built into the
modem allow a rapid check of the terminals, modems, and telephone line
interface. This procedure can be used to verify normal system operation
and to isolate faulty equipment in case of failure.
Ensure the units are turned on and remote loops are enabled at both sites
before starting the fault isolation procedure.

Note
In some cases the observer must distinguish between rapid LED
blinking and steady on in tests.

Telephone Interface
1) Connect the modem to the dial-in line by the LINE jack on the back
panel.
2) If the dial line is installed with a standard data jack, connect a
standard telephone to the TELSET/LEASED LINE jack on the
back panel of the modem and use the standard telephone procedure.

Standard Phone
1) Configure the modem to V.34 33600 IDLE mode by pressing the
TALK/ DATA button, and then lift the receiver. No dial tone is
heard. Press the TALK/DATA button to display V.34 IDLE and
wait for dial tone.
2) Dial out; the phone should operate normally.

Modem 3600 D-1


Hardware Options

Modem and Telephone Line Check


Part I
1) Configure the modem for LOCAL ANALOG LOOP WITH
TEST PATTERN. This terminates the local modem telephone
lines into 600 ohms and connects the local modem transmit
output amplifier back to its own receiver through the AGC.
Transmit input data from the terminal is inhibited and is
substituted with a V.52 test pattern.
2) This test checks operation of the local modem modulator and
demodulator circuitry and should be attempted at both local and
remote sites if operators are available.
3) When random errors are present, the TEST PATTERN ERRORS
display counts receive errors.
4) If the circuitry is working properly, the front panel indicators
show the following:

5) Configure the modem for LOCAL ANALOG LOOP to switch


the transmitter back to its normal data input.
6) If the transmit data input is in a mark hold condition, both the TD
and RD indicators should remain off.
7) If the transmit data input is in a space hold condition, both the
TD and RD indicators should come on. All other indicators
should remain the same.
8) If the indicators are correct, the modem is probably operating
correctly.
9) If the preceding tests were not successful, call Technical
Services. Refer to the “Calling Technical Support” section on
page 12-2.

D-2 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Part II
This part determines the performance of the local and remote modems
and the telephone circuits. It also determines each modem's ability to
receive a transmitted signal from the other site, properly equalize and
decode the signal and then loop this regenerated signal into the
transmitter for transmission back to the other modem. This test applies
to both leased line and dial line operation.
1) Configure the local modem for REMOTE DIGITAL LOOP
WITH TEST PATTERN. This signals the remote modem to go
into digital loop. The remote modem receives and then
retransmits the data back to the local mode. If the digital bilateral
loop is enabled at the remote, the remote DTE is looped back to
itself.
2) An alternative to the above procedure is to request the operator at
the remote modem to configure his modem for LOCAL
DIGITAL LOOP. Configure the local modem for TEST
PATTERN. The remote modem receives and retransmits the data
back to the local modem.
3) The TEST PATTERN ERRORS display will count received
errors.
4) At the local modem, the indicators should be as follows:

5) To further test the modem and communications link, reverse the


system loopback. First exit the existing loopback test. Reverse
the roles of the local and remote modems and repeat step two.
Note
If the bilateral digital loop is enabled at the local modem, the
DTE interface is looped to itself and permits the DTE to
check the interface circuitry as well as itself.

Modem 3600 D-3


Appendix E
Command Index and Defaults

General
This reference guide provides asynchronous command characters and
their descriptions. The pages listed provide initial information on the
commands. The S-registers listed are cross references (see the“Status
Registers” section on page -21).

Note
Bold text indicates command parameter defaults.
Command Page S-Reg Description
AT page 5- -- Attention code - command prefix
3
A/ page 5- -- Repeat last command
4
+++ page 5- S2, Escape sequence (pause, + + +, pause)
22 S12
A page 5- -- Answer
17
D page 5- -- Dial
13,
page 9-
4
Dial Modifiers:
T page 5- S14 Tone dial
P 14 S14 Pulse dial
, S8 Long pause (2 sec or S8 value)
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-1


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


W page 5- S7 Wait for 2nd dial tone (S7 value)
! 14 -- Flash switchboard
R -- Switch to answer mode after dialing
; -- Return to command mode after dialing
@ page 5- -- Wait for 5 seconds of silence
Sn 15 -- Dial stored command line
E page 5- S14 Local character echo off
E1 22 S14 Local character echo on
H page 5- -- Hang up †
H1 23 -- Forces modem off hook †
H2 S14 Set H command to V.32 †
H3 S14 Set H command to fast †
I page 5- -- Request product code
I1 24 -- Request EPROM CRC value
I3 -- Request product version
I4 -- Returns Modem 3600
I5 -- Disconnect reason
L, L1, L2 page 5- S22 Speaker volume low
L3 24 S22 Speaker volume high
M page 5- S22 Speaker off
M1 24 S22 Speaker off when carrier is present
M2 S22 Speaker always on
M3 S22 Speaker off when dialing and carrier is
present
O page 5- -- Restore data mode (after escape) †
O1 25 -- Retrain and restores data mode (after
escape) †
Q page 5- S14 Response displays on
Q1 6 S14 Response displays off
Q2 S14 Response displays on in originate mode
only
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-2 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


Sn? page 10 -- Read value in register n (decimal)
Sn?^ -3 -- Read value in register n
(hexadecimal)
Sn=v -- Set v (value) in register n (decimal)
Sn=v^ page 10 -- Set v (value) in register n
-3 (hexadecimal)
Sn.#=v page 10 -- Set single bit value in register n,#= bit
-4 position 0-7, v = bit value 1 or 0
V page 5- S14 Response codes
V1 6 S14 Response messages
W page 5- S82 Negotiation display disabled
W1 6 S82 Negotiation display enabled
W2 S82 Displays DCE link rate
X S22 CONNECT (code 1), for all speeds, no
dial tone or busy signal detection
X1 S22 Appropriate connect codes for rate, no
dial tone detection
X2 S22 Wait for dial tone (appropriate
connect codes)
X3 S22 Detect busy signal (appropriate
connect codes)
X4 S22 Wait for dial tone, detect busy signal
(appropriate connect codes)
Y page 5- S21 Long space disconnect disabled
Y1 25 S21 Long space disconnect enabled
Z page 5- -- Reset to user option set #1 †
Z1 39 -- Reset to user option set #2 †
&C page 5- S21 DCD always on
&C1 19 S21 DCD on while carrier is present
&C2 S21 DCD off 5 seconds after disconnect
&C3 S21 DCD follows remote RTS
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-3


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


&D page 5- S21 DTR ignored
&D1 20 S21 DTR recalls command mode
&D2 S21 DTR disconnects
&D3 page 5- S21 DTR disconnects and resets modem to
20 stored configuration
&F or &F1 page 5- -- Restore factory configuration 1 †
&F2 39 -- Restore factory configuration 2 †
&F3 -- Restore factory configuration 3 †
&F4 -- Restore factory configuration 4 †
&F5 -- Restore factory configuration 5 †
&F6 -- Restore factory configuration 6 †
&F7 -- Restore factory configuration 7 †
&F8 -- Restore factory configuration 8 †
&F9 -- Restore factory configuration 9 †
&G page 5- S23 No guard tone
&G1 25 S23 550 Hz tone
&G2 S23 1800 Hz tone
&L page 5- S27 Dial line †
&L1 36 S27, Leased line 2-wire †
S32
&L2 S27, Leased line 4-wire †
S32
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-4 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


&M page 5- S27, Asynchronous dial / asynchronous data
25 S30
&M1 S27 Asynchronous dial / synchronous data
&M2 S27 Dials stored number when DTR off / on
transition is detected / sync data
&M3 S27 Manual dial / sync data
&M4 S30 V.25 bis autodialer with BISYNC
protocol / sync data
&M5 S30 V.25 bis autodialer with SDLC protocol
/sync data
&M6 S30 V.25 bis async dialer / sync data
&M7 -- V.25 bis async dialer / async data
&M8 page 5- -- V.25 bis async dialer / BISYNC
25 protocol / sync data (EBCDIC)
&M9 -- V.25 bis async dialer / SDLC protocol/
sync data (EBCDIC, NRZ)
&M10 -- V.25 bis async dialer / SDLC protocol/
sync data (ASCII, NRZ1)
&M11 -- V.25 bis async dialer / sync data
(EBCDIC, NRZ1)
&P page 5- S22 39/61 pulse make / break ratio
&P1 26 S22 33/67 pulse make / break ratio
&R page 5- S21 CTS normal operating state
&R1 21 S21 CTS forced on
&R2 S72 CTS follows DCD
&R9 S72 CTS equals RTS
&S page 5- S21 DSR always on
&S1 20 S21 DSR on when ready to accept data
&S2 S21 DSR off for 5 seconds after disconnect
&S3 S21 DSR follows off hook (OH)
&T page 7- -- Terminate current test †
2
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-5


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


&T1 page 7- -- Initiate analog loopback †
3
&T3 page 7- -- Initiate digital loopback †
5
&T4 page 7- S23 Grant remote commanded digital
6 loopback †
&T5 S23 Denies remote commanded digital
loopback †
&T6 -- Initiate remote digital loopback †
&T7 page 7- -- Initiate self test remote digital loopback
7 †
&T8 page 7- -- Initiate self test analog loopback †
4
&V page 5- -- View configuration profiles
40
&V1 page 5- -- Display received signal status
&V2 40 -- Display active profile
&W page 5- -- Store current configuration to user
38 option set #1
&W1 -- Store current configuration to user
option set #2
&X page 5- S27 Internal clock
&X1 27 S27 External clock
&X2 S27 Receive clock
&Y page 5- -- Powerup with user option set #1
&Y1 38 -- Powerup with user option set #2
&Y? -- Display powerup option set
&Zn=x page 5- -- Store dial string x to location n
40 (n=0-9)
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-6 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


%A page 6- S64 Disable auto-reliable fallback
6 character
%An S64 Set auto-reliable fallback character to n
(n = ASCII 1-127) †
%B page 5- S69 Use DTE speed/maximum DCE speed
%B1 28 S69 300 bps max
%B2 S69 1200 bps max
%B3 S69 2400 bps max
%B4 S69 4800 bps max
%B5 S69 9600 bps uncoded max
%B6 S69 9600 bps max
%B7 S69 7200 bps max
%B8 S69 12000 bps max
%B9 S69 14400 bps max
%B10 S69 600 bps
%B11 S69 16800 bps max
%B12 S69 19200 bps max
%B13 page 5- S69 21600 bps max
%B14 28 S69 24000 bps max
%B15 S69 26400 bps max
%B16 S69 28800 bps max
%B17 S69 31200 bps max
%B18 S69 33600 bps max
%C page 6- S56 Compression disabled
%C1 12 S56 Compression enabled on transmit and
receive data
%C2 S56 Compression enabled on transmit data
only
%C3 S56 Compression enabled on receive data
only
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-7


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


%D page 6- S62 Disable disconnect buffer delay
%Dn 4 S62 Set disconnect buffer delay in seconds n
(n = 1-255)
%E page 5- S60 Disable auto retrain
%E1 30 S60 Enable auto retrain
%L page 5- S81 Disabled minimum DCE speed
%L1 29 S81 Disabled
%L2 S81 1200 bps min
%L3 S81 2400 bps min
%L4 S81 4800 bps min
%L5 S81 9600 bps uncoded min
%L6 S81 9600 bps min
%L7 S81 7200 bps min
%L8 S81 12000 bps min
%L9 S81 14400 bps min
%L10 S81 600 bps
%L11 S81 16800 bps min
%L12 S81 19200 bps min
%L13 S81 21600 bps min
%L14 page 5- S81 24000 bps min
%L15 29 S81 26400 bps min
%L16 S81 28800 bps min
%L17 S81 31200 bps min
%L18 S81 33600 bps min
%P1=pw page 5- -- Set software download password
%P1=D 41 -- Disable software download
%P1? -- Display software download password
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-8 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


%R page 5- S53 Disable automatic rate adaption
%R1 30 S53 Enable automatic rate adaption low
BER
%R2 S53 Enable automatic rate adaption medium
BER
%R3 S53 Enable automatic rate adaption using
high BER
%T page 7- -- Transmit test pattern †
7
%T= page 5- -- Followed by a remote configuration
43 security code, establishes remote
configuration †
%V page 5- -- Display product revision level
31
\A page 6- S63 Maximum block size of 64 characters
\A1 11 S63 Maximum block size of 128
characters
\A2 S63 Maximum block size of 192
characters
\A3 S63 Maximum block size of 256
characters
\B page 6- S79 Transmit a break signal
\Bn 11 S79 Sets break length in 20 ms increments,
n=1-255, default is 35 (700 ms)
\C page 6- S60 Disable auto-reliable buffer
\C1 11 S60 Buffer data for 4 seconds or 200
characters
\G page 6- S54 Disable modem port flow control
\G1 8 S54 Enable modem port XON/XOFF flow
control
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-9


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


\J page 6- S72 Disable slaved DTE/DCE speed
5 (constant speed DTE on)
\J1 S72 Enable slaved DTE/DCE speed
(constant speed DTE off)
\J2 -- Enable 230.4 kbps DTE speed
\J3 -- Disable 230.4 kbps DTE speed
Note
The 230.4 kbps DTE speed is available, but the DTE will not
autobaud to 230.4 kbps. With the modem set for 115.2 kbps,
enter AT\J2 to enable the speed, and reset the DTE for 230.4
kbps. When the modem is set for 230.4 kbps, enter AT\J3 to
disable it if needed. Reset the DTE for 115.2 kbps.
\Kn page 6- S59 Selects action when encountering a
9 break
\K S59 Break option 0
\K1 S59 Break option 1
\K2 S59 Break option 2
\K3 S59 Break option 3
\K4 S59 Break option 4
\K5 S59 Break option 5
\M page 6- S70 V.42 fast detect data sequence disabled
\M1 5 S70 V.42 fast detect data sequence enabled
\N page 6- S70 Normal mode
\N1 6 S70 Direct mode
\N2 page 6- S70 MNP only
\N3 6 S70 MNP or normal
\N4 S70 LAPM only
\N5 S70 LAPM with normal fallback
\N6 S70 LAPM with MNP fallback
\N7 S70 LAPM with MNP and normal fallback
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-10 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


\Q page 6- S54 Disable DTE flow control
\Q1 7 S54 Enable DTE XON/XOFF flow
control
\Q2 S54 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE
\Q3 S54 Enables bilateral CTS/RTS flow
control
\Q4 S54 Disable DCE flow control
\Q5 S54 Enable DCE XON/XOFF flow
control
\Q6 S54 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE
\Q7 S54 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE
\R page 5- S60 Ring indicate, blinks for ring and
21 remains on for duration of call
\R1 S60 Ring indicate, blinks for ring and turns
off when call is answered
\T page 6- S58 Disable inactivity timer
\Tn 10 S58 Set inactivity timer to n (n = 1-255
minutes)
\V page 5- S60 Disable protocol result codes
\V1 6 S60 Enable protocol result codes
\X page 6- S54 No XON/XOFF characters to remote
8 DCE
\X1 S54 Pass XON/XOFF characters to remote
DCE
*AS page 5- -- Disable V.34 asymmetric bit rate
*AS1 27 -- Enable V.34 asymmetric bit rate
*AUn page 5- -- Dial number stored at location n upon
16 transition of DTR in command mode
(n = 1-9)
*CNx,n page 5- -- Store phone number n in location x
40 (x = 1-9)
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-11


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


*DA page 5- -- Switches modem to talk mode †
*DA1 32 -- Switches modem to data mode †
*DB page 5- S32 Manual dial backup operation
*DB1 36 S32 Automatic dial backup operation
*DG page 7- S34 Disables bilateral digital loop
*DG1 7 S34 Enables bilateral digital loop
*FB page 5- S29 Ignore pin 23
*FB1 22 S29 Pin 23 transition causes DTE speed
fallback
*FT page 5- S29 Disable fast train
*FT1 32 S29 Enable fast train
*IC -- Disregard incoming call
*LA page 7- S34 Ignore pin 18
*LA1 8 S34 DTE commanded LAL enabled
*LB page 5- -- Return to leased line from dial backup†
36
*LC page 5- S32 Line current disconnect disabled
*LC1 32 S32 Short (8 ms) line current disconnect
*LC2 S32 Long (90 ms) line current disconnect
*LD page 5- -- Manual dial backup
36
*MM page 5- -- Automode (modulation)
*MM1 27 -- V.21
*MM2 -- Bell 103J
*MM3 -- Reserved
*MM4 -- Bell 212A
*MM5 -- V.22 bis
*MM6 -- V.27 bis 4-wire leased only
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-12 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


*MM7 page 5- -- Reserved
*MM8 27 -- V.29 4-wire leased only
*MM9 -- Reserved
*MM10 -- V.33 4-wire leased only
*MM11 -- V.32 bis
*MM12 -- V.34
*ND page 5- -- Displays the nine stored numbers
40
*NT page 5- S29 AT command set disabled
*NT1 33 S29 AT command set enabled
*OR page 5- S14 Originate
*OR1 36 S14 Forced answer
*RC page 5- S57 15 - 4800 bps, 18 - 9600 bps
*RC1 8 S57 11 - 4800 bps, 12 - 9600 bps
*RD page 7- S34 Ignore pin 21
*RD1 8 S34 DTE commanded RDL enabled
*RO page 5- S29 Retain options at disconnect
*RO1 41 S29 Restore options at disconnect
*RR page 5- -- Rate negotiate to 2400 †
*RR1 31 -- Rate negotiate to 4800 †
*RR2 -- Rate negotiate to 7200 †
*RR3 -- Rate negotiate to 9600 †
*RR4 -- Rate negotiate to 12000 †
*RR5 -- Rate negotiate to 14400 †
*RR6 -- Rate negotiate to 16800 †
*RR7 -- Rate negotiate to 19200 †
*RR8 -- Rate negotiate to 21600 †
*RR9 -- Rate negotiate to 24000 †
*RR10 -- Rate negotiate to 26400 †
*RR11 -- Rate negotiate to 28800 †
*RR12 -- Rate negotiate to 31200 †
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-13


Hardware Options

Command Page S-Reg Description


*RR13 page 5- -- Rate negotiate to 33600 †
31
*TDn page 5- S51 Sets dial transmit level -10 to -30 dBm
33
*TH page 5- S97 Low V.34 rate selection threshold
27 (10-6 BER)
*TH1 S97 Medium V.34 rate selection threshold
(10-4 BER)
*TH2 S97 High rate selection threshold
(10-2 BER)
*TLn page 5- S52 Sets leased line transmit level to n
36 where n is a number between 0 and 30
corresponding to 0 to -30 db †
$H page 5- -- Online quick reference
$H= 32 -- Online quick reference for string
string
$V -- Display product serial number
$Y page 5- -- Enable soft download flash
41
† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-14 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Caller ID Commands
Command Page S-Reg Description
*ID page 5- -- Disable Caller ID
*ID1 17 -- Enable Caller ID

Distinctive Ring Commands


Command Page S-Reg Description
*DR page 5- S53 Disable Distinctive Ring
*DR=1 18 S53 Enable Distinctive Ring

Fax Commands
Fax Command Page Description
+FCLASS=0 page 9- Service Class 0 (data modem) †
+FCLASS=1 6 Service Class 1 (fax modem) †
+FCLASS? Display current Service Class settin g †
+FCLASS=? Display available Service Class settings †
+FAA= page 9- Enables fax auto answer function
*FR 10 Fax auto answer DTE autobaud forced to
>=19200
*FR1 Fax auto answer DTE autobaud forced to
=19200
*FR? Display option status
* Cannot executed from remote configuration

Class 1 Commands Valid in Only Fax Mode


Command Page Description
+FTH=(MOD) page Transmit HDLC data with (MOD) carrier *
9-9
+FRH=(MOD) page Receive HDLC data with (MOD) carrier *
9-9
+FRM=(MOD) page Receive data with (MOD) carrier *
9-8
+FRS=(Time) page Waits for silence (10 ms intervals, 0-255) *
9-7

Modem 3600 E-15


Hardware Options

Command Page Description


+FTM=(MOD) page Transmit data with (MOD) carrier *
9-8
+FTS=(Time) page Stop transmission and pause (10 ms
9-6 intervals, 0-255) *
* cannot be executed from remote configuration
NOTE: The (MOD) parameter can be one of the following values: 0 or
ValueModulationSpeed
3V.21 channel 300 bps
24V.27 ter2400 bps
38V.27 ter4800 bps
72V.297200 bps
73V.177200 bps
74V.177200 bps with short train
96V.299600 bps
97V.179600 bps
98V.179600 bps with short train
121V.1712000 bps
122V.1712000 bps with short train
145V.1714400 bps
146V.1714400 bps with short train
+FTx=? page Check range for values supported where x
+FRx=? 9-9 may be M, S, or H. If x is M or H, the modem
returns 3, 24, 48, 72, 73, 96, 97, 98, 121,
122, 145, 146. If x is S, the modem returns
0-255.
+FCERROR Carrier different from specified in +FRM or
+FRH

E-16 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Security Commands
Command Page Description
Low Security
$S=x page 8- Sets an empty password location to x
$C=x,y 4 Changes either password where x represents the
old password and y is the new one
$C=x,- Deletes password x from memory
$DR Reset security
$D=x Disables security where x is either password
$D? or $E? Displays the current status of security
$E=x Enables security where x is either password
High Security
$Cn=m page 8- Set user callback number. n = user number and
8 m = the callback number
$D page 8- Disable security
7
$E? or $D? page 8- Display current security status
10
$EH=pw page 8- Enable security (pw = superuser password) †
7
$F= page 8- Reinitialize security
pw$pw 10
$IBn page 8- Display user information for a block of up to
11 ten valid users (n = first user number)
$In Display user information (n = user number)
$Ln=m page 8- Set security level for the user specified by n (m
8 = security level)
$M Display illegal attempts information
$M* Reset illegal attempts registers/restore
suspended users to normal status
$Mn Reset illegal attempts registers and restore
suspended user n to normal status
†cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-17


Hardware Options

$Pn= page 8- Set user password; n = user number and new


pw$pw 8 password (n = 0 for superuser pw = password)
$Rn page 8- Remove a user (n = user number)
10
$S? page 8- Display current user status (superuser / user)
10
$W0 page 8- Disable user changes (password and callback
9 number) †
$W1 Enable user changes (password and callback
number) †
$W2 Enable remote superuser †
$W? Display user changes remote superuser option
status
$$ page 8- Local logoff
11
$n=pw page 8- Local logon (n = user number and pw =
11 password)
page 8-
11
$S=pw page 8- Request to enter superuser status (pw =
11 password)
†cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-18 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Remote Configuration Commands


Command Page Description
%P=n page Set remote configuration security code to value
5-42 n (0 to 99999999)
%P? Display local modem remote configuration
security code
%P= Clear security code
(blank)
*RA page Disable remote configuration
*RA1 5-44 Enable remote configuration
*RB Remote configuration DTE speed = 300 bps
*RB1 Remote configuration DTE speed = 600 bps
*RB2 Remote configuration DTE speed = 1200 bps
*RB3 Remote configuration DTE speed = 2400 bps
*RB4 Remote configuration DTE speed = 4800 bps
*RB5 Remote configuration DTE speed = 7200 bps
*RB6 Remote configuration DTE speed = 9600 bps
*RB7 page Remote configuration DTE speed = 12000 bps
*RB8 5-44 Remote configuration DTE speed = 14400 bps
*RB9 Remote configuration DTE speed = 16800 bps
*RB10 Remote configuration DTE speed = 19200 bps
*RB11 Remote configuration DTE speed = 21600 bps
*RB12 Remote configuration DTE speed = 24000 bps
*RB13 Remote configuration DTE speed = 26400 bps
*RB14 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28800 bps
*RB15 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28400 bps
*RB16 Remote configuration DTE speed = 57600 bps
*RB17 Remote configuration DTE speed = 115200 bps

Modem 3600 E-19


Hardware Options

Command Page Description


*RF page 7 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit
*RF1 5-44 7 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
*RF2 7 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
*RF3 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
*RF4 8 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit
*RF5 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
*RF6 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
*RF7 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
*RQ page Exit remote configuration, save new
5-45 configuration
*RQ1 Exit remote configuration, discard new
configuration

E-20 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Status Registers
Default
RO/
S-Reg Page Function Factory Set
RW
#1
S0 RW page 1 Ring to answer 1
S1 RO 0-4 Ring count 0
S2 RW Escape sequence character 43 (+)
S3 RW End-of-line character 13 (CR)
S4 RW Line-feed character 10 (LF)
S5 RW page 1 Backspace character 8 (BS)
S6 RW 0-5 Pause before blind dialing 2 (2 sec)
S7 RW Pause for carrier 30 (30 sec)
S8 RW Pause for comma 2 (2 sec)
S9 RW Carrier validation 6 (0.6 sec)
S10 RW Loss carrier delay time 14 (1.4 sec)
S11 RO page 1 DTMF tone duration 80 ms
S12 RW 0-6 Escape sequence pause 50 (1 sec)
S14 RW page 1 Bit mapped 8A hex
0-7
S16 RO page 1 System tests 0
S18 RW 0-8 Test timer 0
S21 RW page 1 Bit mapped B4 hex
0-9
S22 RW page 1 Bit mapped 46 hex
S23 RW 0-10 Bit mapped 01 hex
S25 RW page 1 DTR recognition time 5 (0.5 sec)
S26 RW 0-11 RTS/CTS delay 0
S27 RW Bit mapped 0
S28 RW Lookback timer 15 min
S29 RW page 1 Bit mapped 0
S30 RW 0-12 V.25 mode selection 0
RO=Read only RW=Read or write

Modem 3600 E-21


Hardware Options

Default
RO/
S-Reg Page Function Factory Set
RW
#1
S32 RW page 1 Bit mapped 06 hex
S34 RW 0-13 Bit mapped 60 hex
S35 RW Default dial number 1
S41 RW page 1 Remote configuration escape 3d hex
0-13 character
S42 RW Remote configuration guard 32 hex
time
S44 RW DTE XON character 11 hex
S45 RW DTE XOFF character 13 hex
S49 RW DCE XON character 11 hex
S50 RW DCE XOFF character 13 hex
S51 RW Dial transmit level 10
S52 RW page 1 Lease transmit level 0
S53 RW 0-15 Bit mapped 0
S54 RW page 1 Bit mapped 63 hex
0-16
S56 RW page 1 V.42 compression 03 hex
S57 RW 0-17 Bit mapped 0
S58 RW Inactivity timer 0
S59 RW page 1 MNP break control 5
S60 RW 0-18 Bit mapped 5b hex
S61 RO page 1 DTE word length, parity 18 hex
S62 RW 0-19 Disconnect buffer delay 0
S63 RW Maximum protocol block size 255
S64 RW page 1 Auto-reliable character 0
S67 RO 0-20 Link speed status 0
S69 RW page 1 Maximum DCE speed 18
0-22
RO=Read only RW=Read or write

E-22 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Default
RO/
S-Reg Page Function Factory Set
RW
#1
S70 RW page 1 Protocol operating mode 0f hex
S71 RO 0-23 Protocol operating mode 0
status
S72 RW page 1 Bit mapped 0
S73 RW 0-24 Password timeout security 0
S74 RW Callback delay 15
S75 RW Callback retry 0
S76 RW page 1 Callback retry delay 15
S77 RW 0-25 Lockout threshold 0
S78 RW Autocallback timer 30
S79 RW Break length 35
S80 RO page 1 Serial port speed 20
0-26
S81 RW page 1 Minimum DCE rate 1
S82 RW 0-27 Bit mapped 0 hex
S84 RO page 1 Negotiation status 0
S88 RW 0-28 Modulation type 0
S91 RW page 1 Current modulation 0
S95 RW 0-29 V.34 settings f3 hex
S96 RW page 1 V.34 settings a0 hex
S97 RW 0-30 Bit mapped 06 hex
RO=Read only RW=Read or write

Modem 3600 E-23


Hardware Options

V.25 bis Dialer Commands


Synchronous
Page Description
Command
CIC page Connect incoming call command
11-8
CRN nn...n page Dial command (nn...n = number to be dialed)
0-9 11-5 DTMF and pulse digit
*# DTMF digit
W Wait for second type of dial tone
> Pause for 1 second
= Pause for 3 seconds
< Pause for programmed delay time
P Pulse dial
T Tone dial
& Flash (go on hook) for 1/2 second
; Parameter separator
Space, dash, page Clarity characters
parenthesis, 11-4
period
CRRn page Redial the last number a maximum of n times
11-8
CRSa page Dial stored number command (a = address)
11-6
DIC page Disregard incoming call command
11-7
PRK page Save current option settings
11-12
PRLa;b page Link number at address a with number at
11-8 address b
PRNa; nn...n page Program number command (nn...n = number
11-5 to be dialed, a = address)
PROxxx;yy;0; page Program options command (xxx = register
0... 11-10 address, yy = option count)

E-24 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Synchronous
Page Description
Command
PRPn page Restores current option settings to the factory
11-12 defaults in default bank n (1-9)
RLL page Request list of linked numbers command
11-9
RLN page Request list of stored numbers command
11-7
RLOxxx;yy page Request list of stored options command
11-13 (xxx = register address, yy = option count)
RLV page Request list of version information command
11-10

Modem 3600 E-25


Hardware Options

V.25 Response Messages


Response Message Meaning
CFIAB Call failure - answer back tone but no
connection
CFIDT Call failure - no dial tone
CFIET Call failure - reorder or busy
CFILD Call failure - link list complete
CFINS Call failure - number not stored
CFINT Call failure - no answer back tone, no
ringback
CFIRT Call failure - timeout occurred
CNX @ 33600 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 33600
CNX @ 31200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 31200
CNX @ 28800 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 28800
CNX @ 26400 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 26400
CNX @ 24000 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 24000
CNX @ 21600 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 21600
CNX @ 19200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 19200
CNX @ 16800 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 16800
CNX @ 14400 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 14400
CNX @ 12000 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 12000
CNX @ 9600 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 9600

E-26 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Response Message Meaning


CNX @ 7200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 7200
CNX @ 4800 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 4800
CNX @ 2400 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 2400
CNX @ 1200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection
made at 1200
INC Incoming ring detected
INVCU Invalid command - command unknown
INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error
INVPS Invalid command - parameter syntax
error
INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error
VAL Valid command received

Modem 3600 E-27


Hardware Options

Factory Option Sets

Factory Option Set #1


(Asynchronous Dial-up with V.42 bis Protocol)
(AT&F or AT&F1)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabled
Modulation automode DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold high DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Dial line Wait for dial tone
Jack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 seconds
Line current disconnect long Pause delay 2 seconds
Long space disconnect enabled Call timeout 30 seconds
V.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring
Autocallback disabled

PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE OPTIONS


LAPM protocol enabled Async data
MNP protocol enabled DTE rate - 115200
Protocol fallback enabled 8 bit, no parity
Data compression normal Async controlled dialer
Constant DTE speed AT command set enabled
DTE flow control RTS DTR disconnects
DCE flow control CTS DSR forced high
XON/XOFF pass through disabled DCD normal
Inactivity timer off CTS forced high
Break control 5 DTE fallback disabled
V.42 fast detect enabled Options retained at disconnect

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect

E-28 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 2


(Asynchronous Dial-up without V.42 bis Protocol)
(AT&F2)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabled
Modulation automode DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Dial line Wait for dial tone
Jack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 seconds
Line current disconnect long Pause delay 2 seconds
Long space disconnect enabled Call timeout 30 seconds
V.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring
Autocallback disabled

PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE OPTIONS


LAPM protocol disabled * Async data
MNP protocol disabled * DTE rate - 115200
Normal buffer mode * 8 bit, no parity
Constant DTE speed Async controlled dialer
DTE flow control disabled * AT command set enabled
DCE flow control disabled * DTR disconnects
XON/XOFF pass through disabled *DSR forced high
Inactivity timer off DCD normal
Break control 0 * CTS forced high
V.42 fast detect disabled * DTE fallback disabled
Options retained at disconnect

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect
*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-29


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set #3


(Synchronous Dial-up)
(AT&F3)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabled
Modulation automode DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Dial line Wait for dial tone
Jack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 seconds
Line current disconnect long Pause delay 2 seconds
Long space disconnect disabled * Call timeout 30 seconds
V.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring
Autocallback disabled

PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE OPTIONS


LAPM protocol disabled * Sync data *
MNP protocol disabled * Dial method manual *
Direct buffer mode * AT command set disabled *
DTE flow control disabled * DTR disconnects *
DCE flow control disabled * DSR normal *
XON/XOFF pass through disabled DCD normal
Inactivity timer off CTS follows RTS *
Break control 0 * RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *
V.42 fast detect disabled * DTE fallback disabled
Options retained at disconnect

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-30 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 4


(Synchronous 4-wire Leased Line)
(AT&F4)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop enabled *
V.34 modulation * DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Leased line * Wait for dial tone
4-wire * Wait delay 2 seconds
Transmit level - 0 dBm * Pause delay 2 seconds
Dial backup manual * Call timeout 60 seconds *
Lookback timer - 15 min * Answer on 1 ring
Jack type RJ11 Autocallback disabled
Line current disconnect long
Long space disconnect enabled DTE OPTIONS
V.22 guard tone disabled Sync data *
AT command set disabled *
PROTOCOL OPTIONS Ignores DTR *
LAPM protocol disabled * DSR normal *
MNP protocol disabled * DCD normal
Direct buffer mode * CTS follows RTS *
DTE flow control disabled * RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *
DCE flow control disabled * DTE fallback disabled
XON/XOFF pass through disabled Options retained at disconnect
Inactivity timer off
Break control 0 *
V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-31


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set #5


(Asynchronous 4-wire Leased Line withV.42bis Protocol)
(AT&F5)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabled
V.34 modulation * DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold high DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Leased line, 4-wire * Wait for dial tone
Transmit level - 0 dBm * Wait delay 2 seconds
Dial backup manual * Pause delay 2 seconds
Lookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 seconds
Jack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ring
Line current disconnect long Autocallback disabled
Long space disconnect enabled
V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS
Async data
PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE rate - 115200
LAPM protocol enabled 8 bit, no parity
MNP protocol disabled * AT command set enabled
Protocol fallback disabled * Ignores DTR *
Data compression normal DSR forced high
Constant DTE speed DCD normal
DTE flow control RTS CTS forced high
DCE flow control CTS DTE fallback disabled
XON/XOFF pass through disabled Options retained at disconnect
Inactivity timer off
Break control 5
V.42 fast detect enabled

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect
*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-32 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 6


(Asynchronous 4-wire Leased Line withoutV.42bis Protocol)
(AT&F6)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabled
V.34 modulation * DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Leased line, 4-wire * Wait for dial tone
Transmit level - 0 dBm * Wait delay 2 seconds
Dial backup manual * Pause delay 2 seconds
Lookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 seconds
Jack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ring
Line current disconnect long Autocallback disabled
Long space disconnect enabled
V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS
Async data
PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE rate - 115200
LAPM protocol disabled * 8 bit, no parity
MNP protocol disabled * AT command set enabled
Normal buffer mode Ignores DTR *
Constant DTE speed DSR forced high
DTE flow control disabled * DCD normal
DCE flow control disabled * CTS forced high
XON/XOFF pass through disabled DTE fallback disabled
Inactivity timer off Options retained at disconnect
Break control 0 *
V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-33


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 7


(Synchronous 2-wire Leased Line Normal Originate)
(AT&F7)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop enabled
V.34 modulation * DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Leased line, 2-wire * Wait for dial tone
Transmit level - 0 dBm * Wait delay 2 seconds
Dial backup manual * Pause delay 2 seconds
Lookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 seconds
Jack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ring
Line current disconnect long Autocallback disabled
Long space disconnect disabled *
V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS
Sync data *
PROTOCOL OPTIONS AT command set disabled *
LAPM protocol disabled * Ignores DTR *
MNP protocol disabled * DSR normal *
Direct buffer mode * DCD normal
DTE flow control disabled * CTS follows RTS *
DCE flow control disabled * RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *
XON/XOFF pass through disabled DTE fallback disabled
Inactivity timer off Options retained at disconnect
Break control 0 *
V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-34 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 8


(Synchronous 2-wire Leased Line Forced Answer) (AT&F8)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop enabled *
V.34 modulation * DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabled
Forced answer * Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Leased line, 2-wire * Wait for dial tone
Transmit level - 0 dBm* Wait delay 2 seconds
Dial backup manual * Pause delay 2 seconds
Lookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 seconds *
Jack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ring
Line current disconnect long Autocallback disabled
Long space disconnect enabled
V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS
Sync data *
PROTOCOL OPTIONS AT command set disabled *
LAPM protocol disabled * Ignores DTR *
MNP protocol disabled * DSR normal *
Direct mode * DCD normal
DTE flow control disabled * CTS follows RTS *
DCE flow control disabled * RTS/CST delay 0 ms *
XON/XOFF pass through disabled DTE fallback disabled
Inactivity timer off Options retained at disconnect
Break control 0 *
V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONS
Volume low
On until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-35


Hardware Options

Factory Option Set #9


(Synchronous V.25bis Dialer) (AT&F9)
MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS
DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabled
Modulation automode DTE local test disabled
V.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabled
V.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabled
Normal originate Test timeout off
Fast train disabled
Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONS
SQ auto rate disabled Tone dial
Transmit clock internal Auto dial #1
Dial line Wait for dial tone
Jack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 seconds
Line current disconnect long Pause delay 2 seconds
Long space disconnect disabled Call timeout 30 seconds
V.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring
Autocallback disabled
PROTOCOL OPTIONS
LAPM protocol disabled * DTE OPTIONS
MNP protocol disabled * Sync data *
Direct mode * V.25 SDLC dialer *
DTE flow control disabled * Character type ASCII
DCE flow control disabled * SDLC data format NRZ *
XON/XOFF pass through disabled DTR disconnect *
Inactivity timer off DSR normal *
Break control 0 * DCD normal *
V.42 fast detect disabled * CTS follows RTS *
RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *
DTE fallback disabled

SPEAKER OPTIONS Options retained at disconnect


Volume low
On until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-36 Modem 3600


Appendix F
ASCII and EBCDIC Characters

Hexadecimal equivalents of binary and decimal numbers are as follows.


Binary Decimal Hexadecimal
0000 0 0
0001 1 1
0010 2 2
0011 3 3
0100 4 4
0101 5 5
0110 6 6
0111 7 7
1000 8 8
1001 9 9
1010 10 A
1011 11 B
1100 12 C
1101 13 D
1110 14 E
1111 15 F

Hexadecimal Examples:
0101 1011 =5B hex
1001 1101 =9D hex
1110 0010 =E2 hex

Modem 3600 F-1


Hardware Options

The following table lists ASCII decimal, hexadecimal, and equivalent


character values, and EBCDIC characters. The table shows only
available keyboard symbols. Control keys are shown in the right column
of the first table.
ASCII Decimal Hex EBCDIC Control
Symbol Key
(NUL) 0 00 NU (null) @
(SOH) 1 01 SH (start of header) A
(STX) 2 02 SX (start of text) B
(ETX) 3 03 EX (end of text) C
(EOT) 4 04 PF D
(ENQ) 5 05 HT (horizontal tab) E
(ACK) 6 06 LC (lower case) F
(BEL) 7 07 delete G
(BS) 8 08 -- H
(HT) 9 09 -- I
(LF) 10 0A (SMM) J
(VT) 11 0B VT (vertical tab) K
(FF) 12 0C FF (form feed) L
(CR) 13 0D CR (carriage return) M
(SO) 14 0E SO (shift out) N
(SI) 15 0F SI (shift in) O
(DLE) 16 10 DL (data link escape) P
(DC1) 17 11 D1 (device control 1) Q
(DC2) 18 12 D2 (device control 2) R
(DC3) 19 13 D3 (device control 3) S
(DC4) 20 14 RE (restore) T
(NAK) 21 15 NL (new line) U
(SYN) 22 16 BS (back space) V
(ETB) 23 17 IL (light) W
(CAN) 24 18 CN (cancel) X
(EM) 25 29 EM (end of message) Y
(SUB) 26 1A CC Z

F-2 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

ASCII Decimal Hex EBCDIC Control


Symbol Key
(ESC) 27 1B C1 (CU1) [
(FS) 28 1C FS (form separator) \
(GS) 29 1D GS (group separator) ]
(RS) 30 1E RS (record separator) ^
(US) 31 1F US (unit separator) DEL
(SP) 32 20 DS --
! 33 21 SS (SOS) --
" 34 22 -- --
# 35 23 -- --

ASCII Decimal Hex EBCDIC


Symbol
$ 36 24 CP (bypass)
% 37 25 LF (line feed)
& 38 26 EB (end of block)
' 39 27 EC (escape)
( 40 28 --
) 41 29 --
* 42 2A SM
+ 43 2B C2 (CU2)
, 44 2C --
- 45 2D EQ (enquiry)
. 46 2E AK (acknowledgment)
/ 47 2F BL (bell)
0 48 30 --
1 49 31 --
2 50 32 SY (sync)
3 51 33 --
4 52 34 PN
5 53 35 --
6 54 36 UC (uppercase)

Modem 3600 F-3


Hardware Options

ASCII Decimal Hex EBCDIC


Symbol
7 55 37 ET (end of transmission)
8 56 38 --
9 57 39 --
: 58 3A --
; 59 3B C3 (CU3)
< 60 3C D4 (device control 4)
= 61 3D NK (no acknowledgment)
> 62 3E --
? 63 3F SB (substitute)
@ 64 40 space
A 65 41 --
B 66 42 --
C 67 43 --
D 68 44 --
E 69 45 --
F 70 46 --
G 71 47 --
H 72 48 --
I 73 49 ¢ (cent)
J 74 4A . (period)
K 75 4B < (less than)
L 76 4C ( (open parenthesis)
M 77 4D + (plus)
N 78 4E --
O 79 4F & (ampersand)
P 80 50 --
Q 81 51 --
R 82 52 --
S 83 53 --
T 84 54 (leading pad)
U 85 55 --

F-4 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

ASCII Decimal Hex EBCDIC


Symbol
V 86 56 --
W 87 57 --
X 88 58 --
Y 89 59 ! (exclamation)
Z 90 5A $ (dollar sign)
[ 91 5B * (asterisk)
\ 92 5C ) (close parenthesis)
] 93 5D ; (semicolon)
^ 94 5E ^ (caret or ¬)
_ 95 5F --
` 96 60 / (ACK1)
a 97 61 --
b 98 62 --
c 99 63 --
d 100 64 --
e 101 65 --
f 102 66 --
g 103 67 --
h 104 68 --
i 105 69 --
j 106 6A |
k 107 6B ,
l 108 6C %
m 109 6D _
n 110 6E >
o 111 6F ?
p 112 70 ACK0
q 113 71 --
r 114 72 --
s 115 73 --
t 116 74 --

Modem 3600 F-5


Hardware Options

ASCII Decimal Hex EBCDIC


Symbol
u 117 75 --
v 118 76 --
w 119 77 --
x 120 78 --
y 121 79 ` (single quote)
z 122 7A : (colon)
{ 123 7B # (pound)
| 124 7C @ (at)
} 125 7D ' (apostrophe)
~ 126 7E = (equal)
DEL 127 7F " (double quote)
-- 128 80 --
-- 129 81 a
-- 130 82 b
-- 131 83 c
-- 132 84 d
-- 133 85 e
-- 134 86 f
-- 135 87 g
-- 136 88 h
-- 137 89 i
-- 138 8A --
-- 139 8B --
-- 140 8C ≤ (less than or equal)
-- 141 8D (
-- 142 8E +
-- 143 8F --
-- 144 90 --
-- 145 91 j

F-6 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Decimal Hex EBCDIC


146
147 93 l
148 94 m
149 95 n
150 96 o
151 97 p
152 98 q
153 99 r
154 9A --
155 9B --
156 9C x
157 9D )
158 9E ±
159 9F --
160 A0 --
161 A1 ~
162 A2 s
163 A3 t
164 A4 u
165 A5 v
166 A6 w
167 A7 x
168 A8 y
169 A9 z
170 AA --
171 AB Î
172 AC È
173 AD [
174 AE Š
175 AF •

Modem 3600 F-7


Hardware Options

Decimal Hex EBCDIC


176 B0 S0 (SM0)
177 B1 S1 (SM1)
178 B2 S2 (SM2)
179 B3 S3 (SM3)
180 B4 S4 (SM4)
181 B5 S5 (SM5)
182 B6 S6 (SM6)
183 B7 S7 (SM7)
184 B8
185 B9 S9 (SM9)
186 BA --
187 BB °
188 BC
189 BD ] (close bracket)
190 BE ≠ (not equal)
191 BF --
192 C0 { (open brace)
193 C1 A
194 C2 B
195 C3 C
196 C4 D
197 C5 E
198 C6 F
199 C7 G
200 C8 H
201 C9 I
202 CA --
203 CB --
204 CC (unprintable character)
205 CD --
206 CE (unprintable character)

F-8 Modem 3600


Hardware Options

Decimal Hex EBCDIC


207 CF } (close bracket)
208 D0 J
209 D1 K
210 D2 L
211 D3 M
212 D4 N
213 D5 O
214 D6 P
215 D7 Q
216 D8 R
217 D9 --
218 DA --
219 DB --
220 DC --
221 DD --
222 DE --
223 DF --
224 E0 \ (back slash)
225 E1 --
226 E2 S
227 E3 T
228 E4 U
229 E5 V
230 E6 W
231 E7 X
232 E8 Y
233 E9 Z
234 EA --
235 EB --
236 EC (unprintable character)
237 ED --

Modem 3600 F-9


Hardware Options

Decimal Hex EBCDIC


238 EE --
239 EF --
240 F0 0
241 F1 1
242 F2 2
243 F3 3
244 F4 4
245 F5 5
246 F6 6
247 F7 7
248 F8 8
249 F9 9
250 FA |
251 FB --
252 FC --
253 FD --
254 FE --
255 FF (trailing pad)

F-10 Modem 3600


Appendix G
Abbreviations and Acronyms

A COS Call Originate Status


CR Carriage Return
ABT Abort Timer OR Answer CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
Back Tone CRQ Call Request
ac Alternating Current CTRL Control Field
ACK Acknowledgment, positive CTS, CS Clear to Send
ACR Abort Call, Retry
ACU Automatic Call Unit D
ADD Address Field DAA Data Access Arrangement
ADDR Address (AT&T)
ASCII American Standard Code dB, db Decibel
for Information dc Direct Current
Interchange (7 level) DCE Data Communications
AT&T American Telephone and Equipment (modem)
Telegraph DCD Data Carrier Detect
B DCPSK Differentially Coherent
Phase-Shift Keying
BER Bit Error Rate DIC Disregard Incoming Call
BERT Bit-Error-Rate-Test (set) DIS, DS Disable
BIL LB Bilateral Loopback DLE Data Link Escape
Bit Binary Digit DLO Data Line Occupied
bps Bits Per Second DMS Digital Multiplexer System
BSC Binary Synchronous DOS Disk Operating System
Communications DPR Digit Present
DSR Data Set Ready
C DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF Dual Tone Multi
C Celsius Frequency
CA Circuit Assurance DTR Data Terminal Ready
CC Carrier Control
CCITT International Consultative
Committee for Telegraph
and Telephone E
CD Carrier Detect EBCDIC Extended Binary Coded
CFICB Call Failure Indication - Decimal Interchange Code
Local DCE Busy (8 level)
EIA Electronic Industries
CFIDT Call Failure Indication - Association
No Dial Tone EIA-232C,Interface between DTE
CFINT Call Failure Indication - EIA-232Dand Data Interchange
No Answer Back Tone Communication
CFIRT Call Failure Indication - Equipment employing
Ringback Detected serial binary data
Ch Gnd Chassis Ground EN Enabled
CIC Connect Incoming Call ENQ Enquiry
CO Central Office EOA End of Address
Modem 3600 G-1
Abbreviations and Acronyms

EOM End of Message K


EON End of Number KBD Keyboard
EOT End of Text OR kbps Kilobits Per Second
End of Transmission
EPROM Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory
ER Error L
ESC Escape Key LAL Local Analog Loopback
ETB End of Block LAPD Link Access Protocol -
ETC External Transmit Clock D Channel
ETX End of Text LAPM Link Access Protocol for
EXT External Modems
LB OPTS Loopback Options
LCD Liquid Crystal Display OR
F Line Current Disconnect
LDL Local Digital Loopback
FB Fallback LED Light Emitting Diode
FCC Federal Communications LF Line Feed
Commission LL Local Loopback
FF Form Feed LO Line Occupancy
FGND Frame Ground LRC Longitudinal Redundancy
FL Flag Check
FLL Fixed loss loop LSD Long Space Disconnect
FM Frequency Modulation LSO List of Stored Options
Fox Test message (The quick LSV List Version
message brown fox jumps over the
lazy dog) 0123456789
FSK Frequency-Shift Keying
M
mA Milliamps
H MHz MegaHertz
Modem Modulator / Demodulator
HDLC High Level Data Link MR Modem Ready
Control ms Millisecond
Hz Hertz (cycles per second)

N
I
NAK Negative
INC Incoming Call Acknowledgment
IC Industry Canada NET STAT Network Status
INV Invalid NRZ Non Return to Zero
INVCU Invalid Command - NRZI Non Return to Zero
Command Unknown Inverted
INVMS Invalid Command - NS No Signal
Message Syntax Error NT Network Termination
INVPS Invalid Command -
Parameter Syntax Error
INVPV Invalid Command -
Parameter Value Error O
I/O Input / Output OH Off Hook
IS International Standard OS Out-of-Service

G-2 Modem 3600


Abbreviations and Acronyms

P S
PBX Private Branch Exchange SD Send Data
PC Personal Computer SDLC Synchronous Data Link
pc Printed circuit (board) Control (IBM)
PIW Power Indication SGND, Signal Ground
PN Pseudo random SG
PND Present Next Digit SH Switch Hook
POTS Plain Old Telephone SNR Signal / Noise Ratio
Service SPID Service Profile Identifier
PRI Primary SQ Signal Quality
PRO Program Option SQM Signal Quality Monitor
PROG, Programmable SS Systems Status
PR STX Start of Text
PROM Programmable - SYN Synchronization Character
Read Only Memory
PSK Phase Shift Keying
PSTN Public Service Telephone T
Network
PWI Power Indication TC Transmit Clock
TD Transmit Data
TE Terminal Equipment
TEI Terminal Endpoint
Q Identifier
QAM Quadrature Amplitude TELCO Telephone Company
Modulation TELSET Telephone Set
TM Test Mode
TP Test Pattern
R TR Terminal Ready
TST Test
RAD Random Access Method TX Transmit
RAL Remote Analog Loopback
RAM Random Access Memory
RC Receive Clock
RCD Receiver-Carrier Detector U
RCV, Receiver UART Universal Asynchronous
RCVR Receiver / Transmitter
RD Receive Data USOC Universal Service
RDL Remote Digital Loopback Ordering Code
RI Ring Indication
RL Remote Loopback
RLO Request List of Stored V
Options
RLSD Received Line Signal V. CCITT Code Designation
Detector V.24 List of definitions for
RLV Request List of Version interchange circuits
rms Root-Mean-Square between data terminal
RMT LB Remote Loopback equipment and data
RNG Ringback Detection circuit-terminating
RO Receive Only equipment (and
ROM Read Only Memory provisional
RT Remote Terminal amendments, May 1977)
RTS, RS Request to Send Vac Volts Alternating Current
RX Receive VAL Valid
Vdc Volts Direct Current

Modem 3600 G-3


Abbreviations and Acronyms

X
X. CCITT Recommendation
Designation
XMIT Transmit
XOFF Transmitter Off
XON Transmitter On

G-4 Modem 3600


Appendix H
Flash Upgrade

Upgrade your modem easily using this flash update procedure.

What You Need


• A data communications software package that supports a 57.6 kbps
DTE rate and “X modem CRC” protocol
• Flash upgrade file
Look for modem software upgrades on the Web at this address:
http://www.mot.com/MIMS/ISG/Service_Support/software.html

Steps For Downloading


IMPORTANT: Do not abort this process, once started!
1) Activate your data communications software package, and set up
your DTE for 57.6 kbps.
2) Enter AT.
You should receive an OK response message.
3) Enter AT%P1=password (8 digits)
For example: AT%P1=12345678

This entry sets a soft download password. (See theAT command


set for further information on the %P commands if needed.)
You should receive an OK response message.
4) Enter
AT$Y=password (8 digits)
For example:
AT$Y=123456768
You should receive this response message:
SOFTLOAD XM86-1
READY
This means that your modem is ready to be upgraded.

Modem 3600 H-1


Flash Upgrade

5) From your terminal software package, send the “flash upgrade


file” to the modem. You know the download is working because
the LCD displays:
FLASH UPGRADE
IN PROGRESS
Note
Be sure you use the “X modem CRC” protocol.
The modem automatically resets after the upgrade is complete. The
process can take several minutes.
One of two messages returns.
DOWNLOAD OK
indicates a successful upgrade.
DOWNLOAD ERROR
indicates a problem with the download.
Enter ATI3 if you want to verify the latest software update.

Troubleshooting
1) You did not choose the correct download protocol.
Response: Repeat the process.

2) The upgrade flash file is corrupted.


Response: Get a clean file and redo the steps.

3) If all else fails:


Response: See the “Calling Technical Support” section on
page 12-2

H-2 Modem 3600


Service and Support
Introduction
U.S.A. customers who have questions about products or services should refer to
the following sections. Non-U.S.A. customers should contact their local
distributor.

Questions About Product Shipment or Technical Assistance


Please call Black Box at 724-746-5500.

To Access the Black Box Internet Web Pages


Additional company and product information can be found on our Internet Web
site: http://www.blackbox.com/

Sales-Related Issues
Call Black Box at 724-746-5500.

Questions About Billing


Call Black Box at 724-746-5500.

Modem 3600 Service - 1


Index

A $S=x 8-4
Analog loopback 10-8 $S? 8-10
Answer / originate 10-7 $V 5-32
Answer mode $W 8-9
switching to after dialing 5-15 $W? 8-9
Answering a call 3-3 %A 10-20
ASCII %An 6-6
character table F-1 %B 5-28, 10-22
Async DTR dialer %C 6-12, 10-17
DTR async dialer 10-11 %D 6-4, 10-20
Async/sync mode %E 5-30, 10-19
s-register settings 10-11 %L 5-29, 10-27
AT command %P 5-42
answer 5-17 %R 5-30, 10-15
AT command set %T 5-43
disable 5-33 %V 5-31
S-register enable/disabling 10-12 &D 5-20, 10-9
AT command statement 5-3 &F 5-39
AT commands &G 5-25, 10-10
$$ 8-11 &L 5-36, 10-11, 10-13
$C=x, - 8-4 &M 5-25, 10-11, 10-12
$C=x, y 8-4 &P 5-26, 10-10
$Cn=m 8-8 &R 5-21, 10-9, 10-24
$D 8-7 &S 5-20, 10-9
$D=x 8-4 &T 5-43, 10-10
$D? 8-4 &V 5-40
$DR 8-4 &W 5-38
$E=x 8-4 &X 5-27, 10-11
$E? 8-4, 8-10 &Y 5-38
$EH=pw 8-7 &Z 5-40
$F=pw$pw 8-10 *CNx,n 5-40
$IBn 8-11 *DA 5-32
$In 8-11 *DB 5-36, 10-13
$Ln=m 8-8 *DG 10-13
$M 8-9 *FB 5-22, 10-12
$n=pw 8-11 *FT 5-32, 10-12
$Pn=pw$pw 8-8 *IC 5-32
$Rn 8-10 *LA 10-13
$S=pw 8-11 *LC 5-32, 10-13
*MM 5-27

V.3600 Index-1
Index

*ND 5-40 Auto retrain


*NT 5-33, 10-12 s-register settings 10-19
*OR 5-36, 10-7 Autobaud 5-3
*RC 5-8, 10-17 Autocallback
*RD 10-13 s-register settings 10-24
*RO 5-41, 10-12 Autodial backup number to dial
*RR 5-31 DTR number to dial 10-13
*TDn 5-33 Autodialing from front panel 3-2
*TLn 5-36, 10-14, 10-15 Auto-reliable fallback character 6-6
+++ 5-22 Auto-reliable mode 6-2
+FCLASS 9-4
` 10-16
A 5-17, 6-11, 10-20 B
A/ 5-4 BER
AT 5-3 s-register settings 10-15
B 6-11, 10-25 Binary File Transfer (BFT) standard
C 6-11, 10-19 9-10
categories 5-1 Block size
D 5-13 maximum reliable 6-11
E 5-22, 10-7 s-register settings controlling size
F 5-23 10-20
G 6-8, 10-16 Break control 6-9
H 5-23, 10-7 Buffer
I 5-24 disconnect delay 6-4
J 6-5, 10-24 set auto-reliable 6-11
K 10-18
Kn 6-9
L 5-24, 10-10 C
M 5-24, 6-5, 10-10, 10-23 Call termination conditions 3-4
N 6-6, 10-23 Caller ID 5-17
O 5-25, 10-19 Carrier detect level A-3
P 10-7 CCITT 9-1, 9-3
Q 5-6, 6-7, 10-7 Clock
R 5-21, 10-19 external transmit frequency A-2
response commands 5-5 internal transmit frequency A-2
T 6-10, 10-7, 10-17 s-register settings 10-11
V 5-6, 10-7, 10-19 synchronous transmit source of
W 5-6 5-27
X 6-8, 10-10, 10-16 Command Index and Defaults E-1
Y 5-25, 10-9 Compression
Z 5-39 s-register settings 10-17
Attention code (AT) 5-3 Configuration
Auto reliable data buffer remote 5-41
s-register settings 10-19 resetting stored 5-39

Index-2 V.3600
Index

Configuration profile 5-40 Direct mode 6-3, 6-10


Connect messages Disconnect
s-register settings 10-10 buffer delay 6-4
Constant speed interface 6-2 fast 5-23
Cover long space 5-25
removal of C-1 Distinctive ring 5-18
CTS DSR
s-register settings 10-9 s-register settings 10-9
CTS control DSR control
Clear to send (CTS) 10-9 Data set ready (DSR) control 10-9
CTS flow control DTE
s-register settings 10-16 connection of 2-2
CTS follows DCD option serial port adjust 6-5
s-register settings 10-24 DTE fallback
CTS/RTS flow control 10-16 S-register enable/disable 10-12
DTE flow control
s-register settings 10-16
D DTE/DCE constant speed
Data compression 6-2 s-register settings 10-24
V.42 bis 6-12 DTR
Data link flow control 6-8 s-register settings 10-9
Data rates A-2 DTR control
DCD Data terminal ready (DTR) control
s-register settings 10-9 10-9
DCD control DTR dialer
Data carrier detect (DCD) control s-register settings 10-11
10-9 DTR in autoanswer 5-17
DCE speed
s-register settings 10-21
Dial E
pulse ratio 5-26 Echo 10-7
Dial backup local character 5-22
s-register settings 10-13 online character 5-23
Dial modifiers EIA-578 9-1, 9-3
"!" 5-15 Environmental conditions A-1
P 5-14 Error control 6-1
R 5-15 Escape sequence
Sn 5-16 Changing from data mode to
Dial, tone/pulse command mode 5-22
s-register settings 10-7
Dialing 3-2
Digital interface F
specifications A-1 Factory option set
Digital loopback 10-8 loading 5-39

V.3600 Index-3
Index

Factory option sets J


set #1 E-28 Jack
Fallback character 6-6 DIAL pin functions B-1
Fault isolation procedure D-1 TELSET/LEASED LINE pin
Fax commands functions B-1
class1 quick reference E-15
D 11-5, 11-6, 11-7, 11-10, 11-12
quick reference E-15, E-19 L
fax initialization command string 9-2 LAPM 6-1
Fax mode LCD menu 4-2
features of 1-3 Leased line
Fax Modulation 9-7 s-register settings 10-13
Fax modulation rates A-2 Leased lines 2-8
Fax operation 11-5, 11-6, 11-7, Line current disconnect
11-10, 11-12 s-register settings 10-13
Fax rates A-2 Line equalization A-3
fax transmit/receive modes 9-7 Line type
Features 1-2 s-register settings 10-11
Flow control 6-3 Link layer protocols A-3
data link 6-8 Local analog loopback, DTE
s-register settings 10-16 commanded
Flow control, serial port 6-7 s-register settings 10-13
4-wire operation 5-33 Local character echo
Full duplex 5-34 s-register settings 10-7
Fuse 12-1 Logon
Security 8-11
Long space disconnect 10-9
G s-register settings 10-9
Ground C-4
Guard tones
s-register settings 10-10 M
Make/break ratio
s-register settings 10-10
H MNP 6-1, 10-23
HDLC data framing 9-3 MNP compression
s-register settings 10-19
MNP or normal mode 6-9
I MODEM AND TELEPHONE LINE
IC requirements vi CHECK D-2
Inactivity timer 6-10 Modem Options command 11-10
Installation 2-1 Modulation rates A-2
Internet web pages 1

Index-4 V.3600
Index

N Profile
Normal mode 6-2, 6-10 fax operation 9-3
Protocol
compatible with 1-2
O Protocol commands 6-3
Off hook Protocol response messages
command description 5-23 s-register settings 10-19
Offline command mode 5-2 PSTN
Online command mode 5-2 connection 2-7
Operating mode selection 6-6
Operating mode status
s-registers settings 10-23 R
Operation with security Rate renegotiation 5-31
local 8-3 Reliable mode 6-1
Remote 8-2 Remote configuration
Option Sets E-28 security 5-42
Options Remote digital loop request
retaining/restoring 5-41 s-register settings 10-10
Options retained / restored 10-12 Remote digital loopback 10-8
Remote digital loopback, DTE
commanded
P s-register settings 10-13
Parity Request List of Stored Options 11-13
s-register settings 10-19 Response messages 5-6, 10-7, 10-10
Password 8-3, 8-6 Restore Factory Settings 11-12
change 8-4 Returning the modem 12-2
default 8-7 Revision Level 5-31
delete 8-4 RI LED -- ring indicator
set 8-4, 8-8 s-register settings 10-19
Pause 5-14, 10-5, 10-6 Ring indicator
Phone Jack Descriptions B-1 command description 5-21
Phone jack pin descriptions B-1 RTS/CTS delay A-3
Power
AC connection 2-2
DC connection 2-2 S
modem requirements A-1 Save Current Settings 11-12
Power-up procedure 3-1 Security 8-1
PRK 11-12 disabling/enabling 8-4
PRO 11-10 display extended feature status 8-9
Profile display status 8-10
active 5-37 display user status 8-10
factory 5-37 enable/disable high 8-7
stored 5-37 extended features 8-9
factory reset 8-10

V.3600 Index-5
Index

levels 8-5 S25 10-11


passwords 8-6 S26 10-11
remote code 5-42 S27 10-11
remote logon procedure 8-11 S28 10-11
removing a user 8-10 S29 10-12
set levels 8-8 S3 10-5
setting passwords 8-8 S30 10-12
superuser status 8-11 S32 10-13
verify user 8-11 S34 10-13
Serial Number 5-32 S35 10-13
Serial port S4 10-5
DTE adjust 6-5 S44 10-14
Serial Port flow control 6-7 S45 10-14
Signal options S49 10-14
displaying received 5-40 S5 10-5
Size A-1 S50 10-14
Speaker S52 10-14, 10-15
s-register settings 10-10 S53 10-15
Specifications A-1 S54 10-16
S-register S56 10-17
autoanswer 10-4 S57 10-17
hexadecimal/decimal values 10-2 S58 10-17
S-register commands S59 10-18
Sn.#=v 10-4 S6 10-5
Sn=^v 10-3 S60 10-19
Sn=v 10-3 S61 10-19
Sn? 10-3 S62 10-20
Sn?^ 10-3 S63 10-20
S-registers S64 10-20
changing values 10-3 S67 10-21
individual bit command 10-4 S69 10-22
quick reference E-21 S7 10-5
reading 10-3 S70 10-23
S0 10-4 S71 10-23
S1 10-4 S72 10-24
S10 10-6 S73 10-24
S11 10-6 S74 10-24
S12 10-6 S75 10-24
S16 10-8 S76 10-25
S18 10-8 S77 10-25
S2 10-5 S78 10-25
S21 10-9 S79 10-25
S22 10-10 S8 10-6
S23 10-10 S80 10-26

Index-6 V.3600
Index

S81 10-27 11-14


S88 10-28 V.25 bis autodialer commands
S9 10-6 quick reference E-26
S91 10-29 V.25 NRZ/NRZI
Straps s-register settings 10-12
ground option C-4 V.25 protocol selection
Superuser s-register settings 10-12
See Security 8-11 V.25 VAL
Sync clock selection 10-11 s-register settings 10-12
V.32 fast train 5-32
s-register enable/disable 10-12
T V.42 optional detect phase 6-5
Table 5-1 5-9 V.42 bis 6-1
Technical support 12-2 Version level 5-24
Teephone line
specifications A-1
Telco connection A-3 W
Telephone Web pages 1
line connection 2-6 Word length --7/8 bit
Telephone Interface D-1 s-register settings 10-19
Telephone number
storing 5-40
Temperature A-1 X
Test, system 10-8 XON/XOFF 6-7, 6-8, 9-4
Testing A-3 XON/XOFF characters
Tests 7-1 s-register settings 10-16
Timer XON-XOFF characters from DTE
inactivity 6-10 s-register settings 10-14
Transmit break/set break length 6-11
Transmit level
dial line 5-33
leased line 5-36
Transmit output level A-2
2-wire operation 5-34

V
V.25 ASCII / EBCDIC
s-register settings 10-12
V.25 bis
response messages E-26
V.25 bis auto dialer commands
quick reference E-24
V.25 bis Autodialer 11-7, 11-8, 11-9,

V.3600 Index-7
Index

Index-8 V.3600

You might also like